User Guide for KYOCERa models including: MA4000fx, MA4000x, MA3500fx, MA3500x, MA4000FX Ecosys Multifunction Printer, MA4000FX, Ecosys Multifunction Printer, Multifunction Printer, Printer
18 ore fa — Thank you for purchasing this machine. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance,.
Kyocera Ecosys MA3500x ab € 413,20 (2025) | Preisvergleich Geizhals Deutschland
File Info : application/pdf, 827 Pages, 15.53MB
DocumentDocumentkyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Operation Guide
ECOSYS MA4000fx ECOSYS MA4000x ECOSYS MA3500fx ECOSYS MA3500x
2025.03 C1CKDENEN006
Contents
1
Please Read First......................................................................................1
Preface .......................................................................................................................................... 2
Machine Features ........................................................................................................................ 4
Optimize your office workflow ........................................................................................ 4
Save energy and cost ....................................................................................................... 6
Create attractive documents ........................................................................................... 7
Strengthen security .......................................................................................................... 8
Use functions more efficiently ...................................................................................... 10
Color and Image Quality Functions......................................................................................... 12
Basic Color Modes .......................................................................................................... 12
Adjusting Image Quality and Color .............................................................................. 13
Guides Provided with the Machine ......................................................................................... 15
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)................................................................................. 17
Structure of the guide .................................................................................................... 17
Conventions Used in This Guide ................................................................................... 18
Notice .......................................................................................................................................... 22
Safety Conventions in This Guide ................................................................................. 22
Environment .................................................................................................................... 23
Precautions for Use ........................................................................................................ 24
Compliance and Conformity.......................................................................................... 25
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ....................................................................... 27
Wireless Connection ....................................................................................................... 28
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) .................................. 29
Limited Use of This Product........................................................................................... 30
Legal and Safety Information........................................................................................ 31
Energy Saving Control Function.................................................................................... 34
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ................................................................................. 35
Resource Saving - Paper ................................................................................................ 36
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"...................................................... 37
ENERGY STAR Program................................................................................................... 38
Precautions for security when using wireless LAN..................................................... 39
2
Installing and Setting up the Machine ...............................................40
Part Names (Machine Exterior)................................................................................................ 41
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)........................................................................................... 43
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)............................................................... 45
How to hold the device ............................................................................................................. 46
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ......................................................................... 47
Connecting Cables..................................................................................................................... 49
Connecting LAN Cable.................................................................................................... 49
Connecting USB Cable.................................................................................................... 50
Connecting the Power Cable ......................................................................................... 51
Power On/Off ............................................................................................................................. 52
Power on .......................................................................................................................... 52
Power off.......................................................................................................................... 53
Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 54
Operation Panel Keys ..................................................................................................... 54
Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................ 57
Help Screen...................................................................................................................... 59
Login/Logout.............................................................................................................................. 60
Login................................................................................................................................. 60
Log in by ID card ............................................................................................................. 61
Log in using a keyboard................................................................................................. 62
Logout .............................................................................................................................. 63
Default Settings of the Machine .............................................................................................. 64
i
Setting Date and Time.................................................................................................... 64 Network Setup................................................................................................................. 66 Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 78 Installing Software .................................................................................................................... 84 Published Software (Windows)...................................................................................... 84 Published Software (Mac) .............................................................................................. 86 Installing Software in Windows..................................................................................... 87 Uninstalling Windows Software .................................................................................... 94 Installing Software on a Mac OS Computer ................................................................ 96 Configure TWAIN Driver. ..............................................................................................101 Configure WIA Driver....................................................................................................103 Check the counter ...................................................................................................................105 Additional Preparations for the Administrator ....................................................................106 Administrator Privileges Overview .............................................................................106 Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator ..................................................107 Strengthening the Security..........................................................................................108 What is Command Center RX.................................................................................................110 Accessing Command Center RX ..................................................................................111 Changing Security Settings..........................................................................................112 Changing Device Information .....................................................................................113 SMTP and E-mail Settings ............................................................................................114 Registering Destinations..............................................................................................118 Transferring Data from Our Other Products........................................................................119 Migrating the Address Book........................................................................................119
3
Preparation before Use.......................................................................127
Load paper ...............................................................................................................................128
Loading Paper ...............................................................................................................128
Precaution for Loading Paper .....................................................................................129
Paper Specifications available in the Cassettes ........................................................130
Loading in the Cassettes..............................................................................................131
Paper Specifications available in the Multipurpose Tray .........................................135
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ...................................................................136
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type.......................................................................138
Paper Stopper ..........................................................................................................................140
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .....................................141
Make a note of the computer name and full computer name ...............................141
Make a note of the user name and domain name ...................................................142
Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name.....................143
Configuring Windows Firewall ....................................................................................148
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB..............................................................................153
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ....................................................................159
Adding a Destination (Address Book).........................................................................159
Add One Touch Keys.....................................................................................................170
4
Print from PC ........................................................................................173
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ......................................................................................174
Displaying the Printer Driver Help..............................................................................175
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows Sever 2016 and later) ...176
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 11)...................................177
Printing from PC ......................................................................................................................178
Printing on Standard Sized Paper...............................................................................178
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ......................................................................180
Printing with Universal Print .......................................................................................183
Canceling Printing from a Computer .........................................................................187
Printing from the Mobile Device............................................................................................188
Printing by AirPrint .......................................................................................................188
Printing by Mopria ........................................................................................................189
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct .............................................................................................190
ii
Printing Data Saved in the Printer.........................................................................................191 Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ................................191 Printing Documents from Private Print Box ..............................................................193 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................194 Printing Document from Stored Job Box ...................................................................195 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ............................................197 Printing Document from Quick Copy Box..................................................................198 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ..........................................199 Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box...........................................................200 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box....................................201 Printing Documents from PIN Print Box....................................................................202 Deleting the Documents Stored in the PIN Print Box ..............................................203 Printing Document from Universal Print Box............................................................204 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box ....................................206 Job Box Settings ............................................................................................................207
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)...................................................................208 Accessing the Status Monitor......................................................................................208 Exiting the Status Monitor ...........................................................................................209 Quick View State............................................................................................................210 Printing progress tab....................................................................................................211 Paper tray status tab ....................................................................................................212 Toner Status Tab............................................................................................................213 Alert tab..........................................................................................................................214 Status Monitor Context Menu .....................................................................................215 Status Monitor Notification Settings ..........................................................................216
5
Operation on the Machine .................................................................218
Loading Originals ....................................................................................................................219
Placing Originals on the Platen...................................................................................219
Original Specifications available in the Document Processor.................................221
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1) ..............................................................224
Register the program ...................................................................................................224
Recall the program .......................................................................................................226
Overwrite the program ................................................................................................227
Delete the program ......................................................................................................228
Selection key settings...................................................................................................229
Copying ..................................................................................................................................... 230
Copy ................................................................................................................................ 230
Canceling Jobs ...............................................................................................................231
Basic Scanning (Sending)........................................................................................................232
Sending Document via E-mail ................................................................................................233
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................234
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ...........................................236
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA...............................................................................................238
Useful Sending Method ..........................................................................................................239
WSD Scan..................................................................................................................................240
Install the Driver (for Windows 10) .............................................................................240
Install the Driver (for Windows 11) .............................................................................241
Executing WSD scan .....................................................................................................242
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)................................................243
Sending to different types of destinations ................................................................243
Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself).............................245
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) .....................................................................246
Canceling Sending Jobs ..........................................................................................................248
Handling Destination ..............................................................................................................249
Specifying Destination .................................................................................................249
Choosing from the Address Book ...............................................................................250
Choosing from the External Address Book................................................................251
Choosing from One Touch key destinations .............................................................252
Checking and Editing Destinations.............................................................................253
iii
Confirmation Screen of Destinations .........................................................................254 Re-entering the New Destination ...............................................................................255 Recall ..............................................................................................................................256 How to use the FAX Function .................................................................................................257 Using Document Boxes ..........................................................................................................258 What is Job Box? ............................................................................................................258 What is USB Drive Box? ................................................................................................259 What is a Fax Memory RX Box/Subaddress Box/Polling Box?.................................260 Using Removable USB Drive ..................................................................................................261 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive ..............................................261 Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB).........................................................263 Check the USB Drive Information ...............................................................................265 Removing USB Drive.....................................................................................................266 Cloud Linkage Function ..........................................................................................................267 Set up files and folders in a cloud service..................................................................267 Installing Kyocera Cloud Access..................................................................................268 Set Kyocera Cloud Access user account (authorization information). ...................269 Linkage with the Cloud Service ...................................................................................271 Scan and Print using the Cloud Service .....................................................................272
6
Using Various Functions .....................................................................274
About Functions Available on the Machine..........................................................................275
Select a function menu. ...............................................................................................275
Copy ................................................................................................................................ 276
Send ................................................................................................................................ 278
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)...............................................................281
Functions ..................................................................................................................................284
Original Size...................................................................................................................284
Paper Selection .............................................................................................................285
Mixed Size Orig. ............................................................................................................287
Orig.Orientation ............................................................................................................289
Collate............................................................................................................................. 290
ID Card Copy..................................................................................................................291
Density ...........................................................................................................................292
Original Image ..............................................................................................................293
EcoPrint ..........................................................................................................................295
Color Selection ..............................................................................................................296
Sharpness ......................................................................................................................297
Backgrnd Density..........................................................................................................298
Saturation ......................................................................................................................299
Prevent Bleed-t..............................................................................................................300
Contrast.......................................................................................................................... 301
Erase Colors ...................................................................................................................302
Zoom ..............................................................................................................................303
Combine ......................................................................................................................... 306
Border Erase ..................................................................................................................309
Duplex ............................................................................................................................312
Continuous Scan ...........................................................................................................316
JobFinish Notice.............................................................................................................317
File Name Entry .............................................................................................................318
Priority Override............................................................................................................319
FoldingDetection........................................................................................................... 320
Skip Blank Page.............................................................................................................321
Duplex ............................................................................................................................322
Sending SizeSending Size ............................................................................................323
File Format .....................................................................................................................325
File Separation...............................................................................................................332
Scan Resolution.............................................................................................................333
Clarify Text (Noise Removal) ........................................................................................334
Subject/Body .................................................................................................................335
iv
FTP Encrypted TX ..........................................................................................................336 EmailEncryptedTX .........................................................................................................337 DigitalSignature ............................................................................................................338 Storing Size ....................................................................................................................340 Encrypted PDF ...............................................................................................................341 JPEG/TIFF Print...............................................................................................................342 XPS FitTo Page ...............................................................................................................343
7
Status/Job Cancel.................................................................................344
Checking Job Status.................................................................................................................345
Displaying Status Screens............................................................................................345
Details of the Status Screens .......................................................................................347
Checking Job History ...............................................................................................................353
Displaying Job History Screen .....................................................................................354
Sending the Log History...............................................................................................358
Job Operation ...........................................................................................................................359
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ...................................................................................359
Canceling of Jobs...........................................................................................................360
Check the device information ................................................................................................361
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper, and the Condition of the
Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 362
8
System Menu........................................................................................363
Operation Method...................................................................................................................364
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................365
[Report] ..................................................................................................................................... 367
[Report Print] .................................................................................................................367
[Admin Rpt Set.] ............................................................................................................368
[Result Rpt Set.] .............................................................................................................369
[Jobs Log] .......................................................................................................................370
History Management....................................................................................................371
[Counter]................................................................................................................................... 372
[System/Network].................................................................................................................... 373
[Network Setting]..........................................................................................................373
[User/Job Account] ..................................................................................................................420
[User Property] ........................................................................................................................422
[Common Settings] .................................................................................................................423
[Language] ..................................................................................................................... 424
[Default Screen].............................................................................................................425
[Sound] ...........................................................................................................................426
[Display Bright.].............................................................................................................427
[Media Type Set.]...........................................................................................................428
[Orig./Paper Set.] ..........................................................................................................430
[Paper Setup Msg] ........................................................................................................435
[Preset Limit] .................................................................................................................436
[Measurement] .............................................................................................................. 437
[Error Handling] ............................................................................................................438
[Date/Time]....................................................................................................................439
[Timer Setting]...............................................................................................................440
[Function Default] .........................................................................................................442
[Login Operation]..........................................................................................................449
[RAM Disk Mode]...........................................................................................................450
[Format SD Card]...........................................................................................................451
[Disp. Status/Log]..........................................................................................................452
[Keyboard Lang.]...........................................................................................................453
[Keyboard Type] ............................................................................................................454
[Low Toner Alert]...........................................................................................................455
[MaintenanceAlert] .......................................................................................................456
[Remote Printing]..........................................................................................................457
v
[Direct PRN (Web)] ........................................................................................................458 [Show PowerOffMsg]....................................................................................................459 [EnergySaver Set.].........................................................................................................460 [Pause/Resume Set]......................................................................................................461 [CloudConnectSet.] .......................................................................................................462 [Copy] ........................................................................................................................................463 [Printer] ..................................................................................................................................... 464 [Send] ........................................................................................................................................467 [FAX] ..........................................................................................................................................470 [Document Box].......................................................................................................................471 [Application] .............................................................................................................................472 [Edit Destination] .....................................................................................................................473 [Adjust/Maint.] .........................................................................................................................475
9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting) ..........................................................................................478
Overview of User Login Administration................................................................................479
Managing the Job Account from PC ...........................................................................479
Enable User Login Administration.........................................................................................481
Setting User Login Administration ........................................................................................482
Authentication Security................................................................................................482
Adding a User (Local User List) ...................................................................................484
Change the user properties.........................................................................................488
Deleting a user. .............................................................................................................490
Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC ....................................491
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC.......................................................493
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN................................................................494
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ....................................................................495
Local Authorization.......................................................................................................496
Server Settings ..............................................................................................................497
Configure Network User Rights ..................................................................................498
Group Authorization Settings......................................................................................499
Guest Authorization Settings ......................................................................................500
Obtain NW User Property ............................................................................................503
Card Authentication Kit Settings.................................................................................504
ID Card Settings ............................................................................................................507
PIN Login........................................................................................................................510
Using User Login Administration................................................................................511
Overview of Job Accounting ...................................................................................................512
Enable job accounting ............................................................................................................514
Job Accounting .........................................................................................................................515
Set the Job Accounting(Local) ................................................................................................516
Adding an Account........................................................................................................516
Restricting the Use of the Machine ............................................................................517
Editing an Account........................................................................................................518
Deleting an Account .....................................................................................................519
Job Accounting for Printing .........................................................................................520
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .......................................................................522
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ............................................................................523
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .....................................524
Configuring Job Accounting ...................................................................................................525
Default Counter Limit ...................................................................................................525
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ....................................................................527
Print Accounting Report...............................................................................................529
Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................530
Apply Limit .....................................................................................................................532
Copier/Printer Count ....................................................................................................533
Unknown User Settings ...............................................................................................534
vi
10
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................536
Regular Maintenance..............................................................................................................537
Cleaning .........................................................................................................................537
Cleaning Platen .............................................................................................................538
Cleaning Slit Glass.........................................................................................................539
Clean the inside of the main unit................................................................................540
Replacing the Toner Container....................................................................................544
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................548
Solving Malfunctions ....................................................................................................548
Machine Operation Trouble.........................................................................................549
Printed Image Trouble .................................................................................................598
Remote Operation ........................................................................................................622
Responding to Messages.............................................................................................625
List of Transmission Error Codes ................................................................................682
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 736
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................736
Perform image adjustment .........................................................................................737
Clearing Paper Jams ................................................................................................................738
Jam Location Indicators ...............................................................................................738
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray.............................................740
Remove paper jams from Cassette 1 to Cassette 3..................................................741
Remove the paper jammed inside the machine .......................................................743
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover and Duplex Unit...................................748
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) ....751
11
Appendix...............................................................................................753
Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................754
Option configuration ....................................................................................................754
Overview of the Applications .................................................................................................757
Starting Application Use ..............................................................................................757
Checking Details of Application ..................................................................................758
Character Entry ........................................................................................................................759
Key used.........................................................................................................................759
Character Entry Selection.............................................................................................761
Entering numbers and alphabets ...............................................................................762
Entering Symbols ..........................................................................................................763
Entering Characters......................................................................................................764
In the login operation settings, select and enter[Text]............................................766
About Paper .............................................................................................................................767
Basic Paper Specifications ...........................................................................................767
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ................................................................................768
Special Paper .................................................................................................................771
Specifications ...........................................................................................................................781
Machine .......................................................................................................................... 781
Copy Functions..............................................................................................................783
Printer Function ............................................................................................................785
Scanner Functions ........................................................................................................786
Document Processor ....................................................................................................787
Paper Feeder (300 250 sheet x 2)................................................................................788
Backing up your data ..............................................................................................................789
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer ...................................................789
Backing up your date using USB Drive ......................................................................790
Security Quick Setup Function List ........................................................................................791
TLS................................................................................................................................... 791
Serverside Settings .......................................................................................................792
Clientside Settings ........................................................................................................793
IPv4 Settings (Wired Network) ....................................................................................794
IPv4 Settings (Wireless Network) ................................................................................795
IPv6 Settings (Wired Network) ....................................................................................796
IPv6 Settings (Wireless Network) ................................................................................797
vii
Send Protocols: FTP Client (Transmission) .................................................................798 Other Protocols: HTTP (Client).....................................................................................799 Other Protocols: SOAP..................................................................................................800 Other Protocols: LDAP..................................................................................................801 Send Protocols: SMTP (E-mail TX)................................................................................802 Email: POP3 User Settings ...........................................................................................803 Print protocols...............................................................................................................804 Send Protocol ................................................................................................................806 Other Protocols .............................................................................................................807 TCP/IP: Bonjour Settings ..............................................................................................809 Network Settings ..........................................................................................................810 Connectivity ...................................................................................................................811 Interface Block Setting .................................................................................................812 Energy Saver/Timer ......................................................................................................813 User Account Lockout Setting .....................................................................................814 Job Status/Job Logs Settings........................................................................................815 Edit Restriction ..............................................................................................................816 Prevent Mis-sending Settings......................................................................................817
viii
Please Read First
1 Please Read First
Preface .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Machine Features ........................................................................................................................ 4 Color and Image Quality Functions......................................................................................... 12 Guides Provided with the Machine ......................................................................................... 15 About the Operation Guide (this Guide)................................................................................. 17 Notice .......................................................................................................................................... 22
1
Please Read First > Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition. Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine. The product illustrations, screens, settings, etc., in this guide may differ depending on the machine you are using.
We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing, to maintain quality.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure. We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine. A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number before contacting your service representative.
2
Please Read First > Preface
Location of factory-set initial login password
Change the login password to one of your choice for security reasons.
3
Please Read First > Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions. Using Various Functions (page 274) Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used functions with just one touch (Program)
You can preset frequently used functions. Once you register frequently used settings as a program, you can call up the settings simply by selecting the program number. Using this favorite brings the same results even if operated by another person.
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1) (page 224)
Scan originals of different sizes at a time (Mixed Size Originals)
It is useful when preparing conference materials. You can set the different sized originals at one time so you don't need to reset the originals regardless of size.
Mixed Size Orig. (page 287)
Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and produce as one job (Continuous Scan)
It is useful when preparing many-page handouts. When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied or sent as one job.
Continuous Scan (page 316)
4
Please Read First > Machine Features
Send one time with multiple sending options (Multi Sending)
You can send a same document to the multiple destinations using a different method. You can specify multiple destinations of different send methods such as Email, SMB, and Fax. You can reduce your workflow by sending a job at once. Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 243)
5
Please Read First > Machine Features
Save energy and cost
Save energy as needed (Energy Saver function)
The machine is equipped with Energy Saver function that automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate Energy Saver Recovery Level depending on the operation. In addition, the machine can automatically be switched into Sleep and recovered at a specified time for each day of the week.
Energy Saver function (page 78)
Printing with reduced toner consumption (EcoPrint)
You can save toner consumption with this function. When you only need to check the printed content, such as a trial print run or documents for internal confirmation, use this function to save toner. Use this function when a high-quality print is not required.
EcoPrint (page 295)
Reduce paper use (Paper Saving Printing)
You can print originals on both sides of the paper. You can also print multiple originals onto one sheet.
Combine (page 306) Duplex (page 312)
Skip blank pages when printing (Skip Blank Page)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank.
Skip Blank Page (page 321) 6
Please Read First > Machine Features
Create attractive documents
Prevent image bleed-through (Prevent Bleed-through)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-t (page 300)
7
Please Read First > Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file (PDF Encryption Functions)
Use the PDF format's password security options to restrict document viewing, printing and editing.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 327)
Prevent loss of finished documents (Private Print)
Temporarily saving print jobs in the main unit document box and outputting them when in front of the device can prevent documents from being taken by others.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 193)
Log in by ID card (Card Authentication)
You can log in simply by touching an ID card. You don't need to enter your user name and password.
Overview of the Applications (page 757)
Strengthen security (Settings for Administrator)
Various functions are available for administrators to strengthen security.
Strengthening the Security (page 108)
8
Please Read First > Machine Features
Prevent the execution of malware (Allowlisting)
Prevent malware from running and prevent software tampering and maintain system reliability.
9
Please Read First > Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Make the machine quiet (Quiet Mode)
You can make the machine quiet by reducing its running noise. You can switch ON/OFF with one touch.
Use the quiet mode. (page 83)
Expand functions as necessary(Application)
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications. Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are available.
Overview of the Applications (page 757)
Install the machine without concerning the network cables (Wireless Network)
If there is a wireless LAN environment, it is possible to install the unit without worrying about the network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are supported.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 68)
Use USB drive(USB Drive)
It is useful when you need to print documents outside your office or you cannot print documents from your PC. You can print the document from the USB drive by plugging it directly into the machine. Original scanned at the machine can be saved in the USB drive also.
Using Removable USB Drive (page 261) Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB) (page 263)
10
Please Read First > Machine Features
Specify image file format (File Format)
You can select the various file formats when sending/storing images.
File Format (page 325)
Detect originals with bent corners (Detection of originals with bent corners)
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected.
NOTE Available only on models supported by this function.
FoldingDetection (page 320)
Perform remote operation (Command Center RX)
You can access to the machine remotely to print, send or download data. You can access to the machine remotely to print data. Administrators can configure the machine behavior or management settings.
What is Command Center RX (page 110)
11
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
The basic color modes are as follows.
Auto Color
Automatically recognizes whether a document being scanned is color or black & white.
Reference Image
Before
After
Full Color
Scans the document in full color. Reference Image
Before
Grayscale
Scans a document in grayscale. Reference Image
Before
Black and White
Scans the document in black and white. Reference Image
Before
For details, refer to the following. Color Selection (page 296)
12
After After After
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color
To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
Adjust the color precisely
I want to... Adjust the density.
Sample image (before)
Sample image (after)
Function Density
For details, refer to the following: Density (page 292)
Adjust the image quality precisely
I want to...
Emphasize or blur the image outline.
Example: Emphasize the image outlines
Adjust the difference between dark and light parts of the image.
Sample image (before)
Sample image (after)
Function Sharpness
Contrast
Darken or lighten the background (the area with no texts or images) of a document.
Example: Lightening the background
Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided originals.
For details, refer to the following: Sharpness (page 297) Contrast (page 301) Backgrnd Density (page 298) Prevent Bleed-t (page 300)
Adjust the scanned image
I want to...
Sample image (before)
Decrease the file size and produce the characters clearly.
For details, refer to the following:
Background Density Prevent Bleed through
Sample image (after)
Function File format
13
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions File Format (page 325)
14
Please Read First > Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed. The guides can be downloaded from the Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). To view the guides on a computer, Adobe Reader Version 8.0 or later needs to be installed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine performance.
To set up the machine: Start using the machine quickly
For safe use of the machine
Use the machine to its fullest Use the fax functions Easily register machine information and configure settings Print data from a computer
Monitor the machine and printers on the network
Setup Guide
Explains the setup procedure to follow in order to print with this machine.
Quick Guide
Describes frequently-used operations and what to do when problems occur.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Safety Guide (ECOSYS MA4000wifx/ECOSYS MA4000wfx/ ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x/ECOSYS MA3501wfx/ECOSYS MA3500wfx/ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Operation Guide (this guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Command Center RX User Guide
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and change settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
MAC Driver Setup Guide
Explains how to install the Mac printer driver and use the printer function (print panel).
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net Viewer.
15
Please Read First > Guides Provided with the Machine
Scan images and save with information Print without using the printer driver
Directly print a PDF file
Adjust the print or scan position
Scan and print through the cloud service
File Management Utility User Guide
Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save scanned documents.
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Maintenance Menu User Guide
Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other settings
Kyocera Cloud Access User Guide
This section explains how to install Kyocera Cloud Access and setting procedures for linking with the cloud service.
16
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Please Read First
Installing and Setting up the Machine Preparation before Use
Print from PC Operation on the Machine
Using Various Functions Status/Job Cancel
System Menu User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) Troubleshooting
Appendix
Description
Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.
Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.
Explains the basic printing method.
Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
Explains user login and job accounting.
Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other problem occurs.
Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
17
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader is used as an example in the explanations below.
1 Click an item in the Table of Contents to jump to the corresponding page.
2 Indicates operational requirements and restrictions to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
3 Indicates supplemental explanations and reference information for operations.
4 Click the underlined text to jump to the corresponding page.
5 Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention [ ] " "
Indicates keys and buttons. Indicates a message.
Description
18
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in Procedures for Operating the Machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation is shown as below.
Actual procedure
1 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key. 2 Press the [ ][ ] key and select [Common Settings]. 3 Select the [OK] key.
Procedure indicated in this guide
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key
19
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Size of Paper
Paper sizes such as A5 and Statement can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation.
Set the paper in vertical orientation
When loading in a cassette
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5-R, Statement-R
When loading in the multipurpose tray
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5-R, Statement-R
Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and paper feeder unit. For details, refer to the following.
Specifications (page 781)
Set the paper in horizontal orientation
When loading in a cassette
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5, Statement
20
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
When loading in the multipurpose tray
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5, Statement
Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and paper feeder unit. For details, refer to the following.
Specifications (page 781)
21
Please Read First > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol.
[General warning] [Warning of high temperature] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol. [Warning of prohibited action] [Disassembly prohibited] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol. [Alert of required action] [Remove the power plug from the outlet] [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
22
Please Read First > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Temperature Humidity
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).
10 to 80% But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. · Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight. · Avoid locations with vibrations. · Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations. · Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. · Avoid poorly ventilated locations. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
23
Please Read First > Notice
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children. If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. · If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large
amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician. · If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician. · If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician. · If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water. Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
24
Please Read First > Notice
Compliance and Conformity
We hereby declare that this product complies with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html
Software Ver.
Frequency Range
Output Power (e.i.r.p)
1.0
2400 - 2483.5 MHz
< 100 mW
1.0
5150 - 5250 MHz
< 50 mW
1.0
5250 - 5725 MHz
< 100 mW
1.0
5725 - 5850 MHz
< 10 mW
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
· The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
Industry Canada statement:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s) / receiver(s) that complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause interference.
2 This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B
* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
NOTE -- Use shielded interface cables.
25
Please Read First > Notice
Caution:
The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems; Operations in the 5.25-5.35GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only.
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. * These above statements are valid in the United States of America, Canada.
26
Please Read First > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned. · Paper money · Bank note · Securities · Stamp · Passport · Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
27
Please Read First > Notice
Wireless Connection
For European Countries
Frequency Range 2400 - 2483.5 MHz 5150 - 5250 MHz 5250 - 5725 MHz 5725 - 5850 MHz
< 100 mW < 50 mW < 100 mW < 10 mW
Output Power (e.i.r.p)
NOTE 5150 - 5350MHz is limited to indoor use in below countries
28
Please Read First > Notice
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable, which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be transmitted. On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the following communication contents. · Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers · Contents of email messages
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the following illegal actions. · Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak) · Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized
information (spoofing) · Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification) · Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction) Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when the product is used. We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the security settings. See the booklet "Instructions for Setting Security on Our Products" for important security tips.
29
Please Read First > Notice
Limited Use of This Product
· Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
· Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
· If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
30
Please Read First > Notice
Legal and Safety Information
Unauthorized reproduction (copying) of all or part of this document is prohibited, with the exception of copyright law exceptions.
Regarding Trade Names
· PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. · KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. · Active Directory, Azure, Excel, Microsoft, Microsoft 365, Microsoft Edge, PowerPoint, Windows and Windows
Server are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. · PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. · Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Inc. in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. · Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. · IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. · AppleTalk, Bonjour, Mac, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc. · Monotype, Helvetica Palatino, Times, and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc., registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in other countries or regions. · Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH. · ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc., registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in other countries or regions. · ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries. · This product has UFST Font Stylizer and TM MicroType ® fonts licensed from Monotype Imaging Inc. installed in this machine. · iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. · iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by Apple Inc. · Google is trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC. · Mopria TM is a registered trademark of Mopria TM Alliance. · Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. · RealVNC, VNC and RFB are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd. in the U.S. and in other countries. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. Neither TM nor ® will be specified in the main text.
31
Please Read First > Notice
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, titles and interests to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. 5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This
License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested. 6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded. 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces. 9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. 10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. 11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2). 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
32
Please Read First > Notice
OpenSSL License
For the Open Source Software license, go into the following URL and select Country > Product Name > OS > Language and then, refer to the "OSS_Notice" from the manual tab in the Download. https://kyocera.info/
33
Please Read First > Notice
Energy Saving Control Function
To reduce power consumption when idle, the device comes equipped with a power management function that automatically shifts to "Sleep" to minimize power consumption after a certain period of time has passed since the device was last used. Sleep (page 78) Power Off Timer (models for Europe)
34
Please Read First > Notice
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. Duplex (page 312) Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
35
Please Read First > Notice
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognized ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or an equivalent quality standard, be used. This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further saving of forest resources. * : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes" Contact your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
36
Please Read First > Notice
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time. Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
37
Please Read First > Notice
ENERGY STAR Program
We participate in the ENERGY STAR® Program. We provide the products that comply with ENERGY STAR standards to the market. ENERGY STAR is an energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing the products that comply with ENERGY STAR, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and cut energy-related costs.
38
Please Read First > Notice
Precautions for security when using wireless LAN
Wireless LAN has the advantage that it allows free LAN connections within the range of radio waves because it uses radio waves to exchange information between a PC and a wireless access point, not using a network cable. On the other hand, radio waves can reach any location though obstacles (such as walls) within a certain range, so if you do not perform security setting, the following problems may occur.
Eavesdropping of communications
A malicious third party may intentionally intercept radio waves and eavesdrops the following types of communications. · Personal information such as an ID, password, or credit card number · Contents of emails
Illegal access
A malicious third party may gain access to your personal or company network without your permission and perform the following illegal actions. · Extract personal or confidential information (information leakage) · Impersonate a certain person and spread false information (impersonation) · Change and transmit the contents of intercepted communications (alteration) · Spread computer viruses to destroy data and systems (destruction) Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points originally have security mechanisms to deal with these problems, so by configuring the security settings of your wireless LAN products and using them, the chances of these problems occurring can be reduced. We recommend that you configure security settings and use the product at your own discretion and responsibility, after gaining a thorough understanding of the problems that may occur if the product is used without security settings.
39
Installing and Setting up the Machine
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
Part Names (Machine Exterior)................................................................................................ 41 Part Names (Connectors/Interior)........................................................................................... 43 Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)............................................................... 45 How to hold the device ............................................................................................................. 46 Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ......................................................................... 47 Connecting Cables..................................................................................................................... 49 Power On/Off ............................................................................................................................. 52 Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 54 Login/Logout.............................................................................................................................. 60 Default Settings of the Machine .............................................................................................. 64 Installing Software .................................................................................................................... 84 Check the counter ...................................................................................................................105 Additional Preparations for the Administrator ....................................................................106 What is Command Center RX.................................................................................................110 Transferring Data from Our Other Products........................................................................119
40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)
1 Document processor 2 Inner tray 3 Eject stopper 4 Cassette 1 5 Main switch 6 Front cover open button 7 Original eject table 8 Original stopper 9 Original tray 10 Original width guide 11 Slit glass 12 Operation panel 13 Original glass
41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior) 14 Original size indicator plate 15 Rear cover 16 Anti-theft slot
42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior) 1 TEL connector 2 LINE connector 3 USB interface connector 4 Network interface connector 5 Conveying cover 6 Paper length guide 7 Paper width guide 8 USB Memory slot 9 MP Tray 10 MP support tray 11 Paper guide 12 Fuser cover 13 Toner container Release Button 14 Toner container
44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
1 Cassette 2 2 Cassette 3
45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > How to hold the device
How to hold the device
When carrying the device, be careful where you hold it. IMPORTANT
To carry the machine, hold the scanner unit as shown in the illustration. Do not hold the control panel of the main unit as this may cause damage.
46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
NOTE If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following. Configuring the Wireless Network (page 68)
Cables that Can Be Used
When a network cable is used to connect the machine
Function Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1
Necessary Cable LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)
47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
When a USB cable is used to connect the machine
Function
Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA)
USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, max. 5.0 m, shielded)
*1 The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. For more information on Network FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
IMPORTANT Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 53)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network. Network Setup (page 66)
49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 53)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2 Power on the machine.
50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting the Power Cable
1 Connect the cable to the machine. Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power on
1 Turn the power switch on.
IMPORTANT Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch.
52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power off
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed. It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT · If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power
switch disables fax transmission and reception. · Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Operation Panel Keys
1 [Status/Job Cancel] key Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
2 [Document Box/USB] key Displays the Document Box/USB screen.
3 [System Menu/Counter] key Display the System Menu/Counter screen.
54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
4 [FAX] key Displays the Fax screen. · (Fax model) only
5 [Send] key The Send Base screen is displayed. You can set the machine up so that the address book screen is displayed.
6 One touch keys Calls destinations that have been registered on the One Touch Keys.
7 [Shift lock] indicator Lights up when the One Touch Key number is between 12 to 22.
8 [Shift lock] key Switches between One Touch Key numbers.
9 [Wi-fi] indicator Lights up when Wi-Fi is connected. · (Wi-Fi model) only
10 Selection keys Select the menu that displayed under the LDC panel.
11 [Processing] indicator Flashes while printing or sending/receiving.
12 [Memory] indicator Flashes while accessing the device's memory or fax memory.
13 LDC panel Displays setting items, the status of the device, and error messages.
14 [Wi-fi Direct] key Configure Wi-Fi Direct settings and display information required for connection and connection status. · (Wi-Fi model) only
15 [On Hook] key Switch between on-hook/off-hook for the phone line. · (Fax model) only
16 [Confirm/Add Destination] key Used to confirm or add destinations.
17 [Address Recall/Pause] key Calls the destination for the previous job. Also used to enter a pause (-) when entering a fax number.
18 [Address Book] key Displays the Address Book screen.
19 [Copy] key Displays the Copy screen.
20 [Back] key Return to the previous screen.
21 [Attention] indicator Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel 22 Arrow keys
Increase/decrease the numerical value at the LCD panel, or select the menu. Also used to move the cursor during character input. 23 [OK] key Confirm the function or the menu inputted, or the numerical value. 24 Numeric keys Input the number or the symbol. 25 [Stop] key Cancel or pause the job in progress 26 [Start] key Start copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations. 27 [Quiet Mode] key The operating sound of the machine can be suppressed. 28 [Authentication/Logout] key Authentication of the switching users and finish operation of each user (Log out). 29 [Energy Saver] key Make this main unit into the Sleep Mode condition. Recovers from the Sleep Mode in case of the sleep mode condition. 30 Program keys Register and call programs. 31 [Reset] key Return settings to the default condition. 32 [Clear] key Delete the value or the letter inputted. 33 [Function Menu] key Display the Function Settings screen.
56
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Here, using the setting menu as an example, operation of the operation panel will be explained. Selecting the [System Menu/Counter] key will display the setting menu.
Displays the direction of arrow keys that are useable on the displayed screen. When you select the [ ] or [ ] key, the selected item moves by one line. When you select the [ ] or [ ] key, the selected item moves to page increments.
When [OK] is displayed, selecting the [OK] key will confirm the selection.
Selecting the [Back] key will return to the previous level in the menu.
* is displayed at the beginning of the selected item.
57
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel When [Exit] is displayed, selecting [Exit] will return to the normal screen from the Setting Menu screen.
58
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel. When [Help] is displayed, select [Help] to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows the machine operation..
59
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
Login
1 Enter the login user name.
1 If the login screen is displayed during operations, select a [Login User Name] and press the [OK] key.
NOTE If the user authentication method is set to [Netwk Authentic.], [Menu] is displayed. Selecting [Menu] and then [Login Type] allows either [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.] to be selected as the authentication destination. Selecting [Menu] and then [Domain] allows a registered domain to be selected. 2 Using the numeric keypad, enter [Login User Name] and select the [OK] key.
NOTE If you do not know your login User Name, please contact your Administrator. If [Select Character] is selected in the login operation settings, select the characters displayed on the screen and enter [Login User Name].
2 Enter the password.
1 Select [Login Password], and select the [OK] key.
3 Select [Login].
60
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Log in by ID card
1 When ID card authentication is enabled and user management is set, "Use ID card to login." appears when the machine is used.
2 Hold the Login card over the ID card reader to log in.
IMPORTANT · Hold the ID card 10 mm or closer to the ID card reader to read the ID card. · Do not stack more than one ID card for reading.
NOTE If you have set [Additional Authentication] to [Use Password], enter your login password after authenticating with your ID card. Refer to the following for the setting method. Additional Authentication (page 508)
61
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Log in using a keyboard
If ID card authentication is enabled, you can log in without using an ID card by entering your login username and password.
NOTE You can allow or prevent logins. Refer to the following for the setting method. Key Login (page 507)
1 Select [Key Login] on the ID card login screen. 2 Enter the login username and select the [OK] key. 3 Select [Login Password] with the [ ] key. 4 Select the [OK] key. 5 Enter the login password and select the [OK] key.
62
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Logout
1 Select the [Authentication/Logout] key. You will return to the login user name/login password entry screen.
NOTE Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances: · When the machine enters the sleep state. · When the auto panel reset function is activated.
63
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
The default settings of the machine can be changed in [System Menu/Counter]. Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.
NOTE For items that can be set with [System Menu/Counter], refer to the following: System Menu (page 363)
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE · To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
[Date/Time] (page 439) · The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Date Setting] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
64
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine Select and set [Date/Time] > [Date Format] > [Time Zone] in this order. [Date/Time] Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. Setting values: Year (2000-2035), Month (1-12), Day (1-31), Hour (0-23), Minute (0-59), Second (0-59) [Date Format] Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Value: [Month/Day/Year], [Day/Month/Year], [Year/Month/Day] [Time Zone] Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time. NOTE Use the [ ] or [ ] key to enter numbers. When you select the [ ] or [ ] key, the input position moves to the left or right and is highlighted.
65
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Mac, UNIX and other platforms. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Configuring Connections on the Web Page
Description Perform individual settings from the system menu.
For the equipped network interface, the connection can be set by using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired, select the desired setting on [Primary Network].
For other network settings, refer to the following: [Network Setting] (page 373)
TCP/IP (IPv4) setting
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [IPv4 Setting] > [OK] key
NOTE
· For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers], in that order.
66
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2 Configure the settings · When using DHCP server · [DHCP]: Configure the settings · When setting the static IP address · [DHCP]: Off · [Auto-IP]: Off · [IP Address]: Enter the address. · [Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255). · [Default Gateway]: Enter the address. · When using the Auto-IP Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · When setting the DNS server In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. · When using the host name with [DHCP] setting set to [Off]. · When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically. Select [Auto (DHCP)] or [Manual]. If you selected [Manual], enter the [Primary Server] and [Secondary Server]. IMPORTANT After changing the setting, perform [Restart Network] with the following procedure, or turn the machine OFF and then ON. [Restart Network] (page 382)
67
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Configuring the Wireless Network
When Wi-Fi settings are configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment.
The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
Configuring Connections on the Web Page Using the Printer Setup Tool
Description
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-style screen, without setting individually in System menu. [Wi-Fi Settings] (page 377)
This is a tool that can be downloaded from Download Center (https:// kyocera.info/). You can configure the connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard. Wired Connection with LAN Cable Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool (page 68)
Command Center RX User Guide
This is a tool that can be downloaded from Download Center (https:// kyocera.info/) and from digital content distribution services. You can configure the connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard.
NOTE
When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired, select the desired setting on [Primary Network]. [Primary Network] (page 402)
Wired Connection with LAN Cable Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or mobile device with the machine locally. To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
NOTE
Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS. [Wi-Fi Settings] (page 377)
1 Connect the machine with a computer.
1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2 Turn on the computer. IP addresses (link local addresses) of the machine and computer are generated automatically.
68
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
69
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 5 Utility tab > of Wi-Fi Setup Tool. The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. NOTE
· Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].
3 Configure the settings
1 [Do not user WPS] > [Next] > [Next] 2 [LAN Cable] > [Next] > [Next] 3 [Quick Setup] > [Next]
The machine is detected. NOTE
· Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search the machine.
· If the device is not detected, select [Detail Settings] > [Next]. You can specify an IP address or hostname as the detection method by selecting either [Express] or [Custom] from the detection methods of the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next] 5 Select [Use device settings] from [Authentication mode] and enter [Login User Name] and [Login
Password] > [Next] Enter the administrator login user name and login password. 6 Configure the communication settings and click [Next].
70
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next] The network is configured.
71
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Wireless LAN Connection by Wi-Fi Direct Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or mobile device with the machine locally. To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to ON) and Restart Network from the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
NOTE Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS. [Wi-Fi Settings] (page 377)
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys >[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings [ ][ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4 Connect a computer or a mobile device with the machine. Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 75)
72
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
5 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
73
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 5 Click of Wi-Fi Setup Tool. The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. NOTE
· Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].
6 Configure the settings
1 [Do not use WPS] > [Next] > [Next] 2 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next] 3 [Detail Settings] > [Next]
Select either [Express] or [Custom] from the detection methods of the machine. You can specify an IP address or hostname as the discovery method. 4 Select the machine > [Next] 5 Select [Use Device Settings.] from [Authentication Mode] and enter [Login User Name] and [Login Password] > [Next] Enter administrator's Login User Name and Login Password. 6 Configure the communication settings and click [Next]. 7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next] The network is configured.
74
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
After configuring the connection settings, you will be able to print in the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows: · Configuring the connection from the operation panel on this machine · Configuring the connection by using push button
Connecting to Computers or Mobile Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings [ ][ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4 Specify the machine from the computer or mobile device. If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes]. The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
75
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Connecting to Computers or Mobile Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct
Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS mobile devices.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings [ ][ ] keys > [Enable] > [OK] key
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Restart Network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Detail Setting] > [OK] key 5 Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password 6 Use the [ ][ ] keys to check the network name (SSID), password, and IP address,
and note them.
7 Configure the mobile device.
1 [Setting] > [Wi-Fi] 2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list. 3 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connected]
The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
76
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Configuring the connection by using push button
When your computer or mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the network using push button.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings [ ][ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > "Restart Network" > [OK] key > [Yes]
4 [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [ ][ ] keys > [PushButton Setup] > [OK] key 5 Press the push button on the computer or mobile device to be connected > [Next]
The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
IMPORTANT You can connect up to 10 mobile devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows: · Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer · Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [ ][ ] keys > [ConnectionStatus] > [OK] key [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [Disconnect] > [OK], in that order. · Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu [Wi-Fi Direct Set] (page 375) · Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX Command Center RX User Guide
77
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Energy Saver function
If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Sleep to minimize power consumption.
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the key, message display and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. For fax-compatible models, when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. In addition, the machine wakes up when the following operations are performed: · Select the [Energy Saver] key. Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows. 10 seconds or less Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
78
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Auto Sleep
Function that automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time. The amount of time before entering Sleep is 1 minute (default setting). When using this machine, select the [Energy Saver] key. Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly. For the procedure for specifying the switch time for the sleep function, refer to the following: Sleep Timer (page 440)
79
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Sleep Rules
You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot be recognized. For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following: [Sleep Rules] (page 440)
80
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Power Off Timer
If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 20 minutes. Power Off Timer (page 441)
81
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Power Off Rule
The Power Off Rule is used to stop the power from automatically turning off. For more information on Power Off Rule settings, refer to the following: [Power Off Rule] (page 441)
82
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Use the quiet mode.
The operating sound of the machine can be suppressed. Set Quiet Mode if you are concerned about the operating sound. If [Quiet Mode] is selected, the [Quiet Mode] key will light and quiet mode will be set.
NOTE In Quiet Mode, the processing speed will be slower than normal.
83
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
To use printer function, TWAIN/WIA connection, or network fax function, download and install the required software from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/).
Published Software (Windows)
Software KX DRIVER
KPDL mini-driver/PCL minidriver FAX Driver Kyocera TWAIN Driver WIA Driver
KYOCERA Net Viewer Status Monitor 5 KYOCERA Net Direct Print Kyocera Quick Scan FONTS Quick Network Setup Tool Wi-Fi Setup Tool Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB
Description
This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used with this driver.
This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software application as a fax via the machine.
This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN compliant software application.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a TWAINcompliant software application is not installed in the computer.
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network.
This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/Reader.
This is a tool that allows you to configure settings for saving or sending scanned originals from your computer.
These are display fonts that enable the machine's builtin fonts to be used in a software application.
A tool to configure the network (wired LAN) settings of the machine.
A tool to configure the wireless network (wireless LAN) settings of the machine.
A tool for creating shared folders on your PC, setting the created shared folders as destination folders on this machine, and the like.
Recommended software
-- --
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
84
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Software Kyocera Cloud Access Kyocera Cloud Access Client
Description
Software that enables the use of cloud services from this product. Software that enables the use of cloud services from this product. Follow the guidance on the screen to install the software.
Recommended software --
--
NOTE
· Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
85
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Published Software (Mac)
Software
Description
Mac Driver
This driver enables files on Mac to be printed by the machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL KPDL and PDF) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine.
Recommended software
--
86
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Windows
Downloading and installing from the website
Download and install a software from our website.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
87
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 5 Driver tab or Utility tab > of the software you want to download. An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.
2 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. Follow the guidance on the screen to install the software. NOTE · Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].
88
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Using the web installer
Install a software by using a web installer downloaded from our website.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
89
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 5 Utility tab > of "Web Installer". A web installer will be downloaded.
2 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
NOTE · Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes].
3 Display the screen
1 Read the license agreement. 2 Click [Accept] if there is no problem.
90
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4 Click [Install].
5 Select a model > [Next]
NOTE · The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify
that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable. · If a desired device is not displayed, select [Add Custom Device] to directly select the device you want
to use.
91
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
6 Install an application.
1 Select software you want to install. NOTE
Software recommended to install have in their checkboxes by default. Change the settings as required.
2 Click [Install]. NOTE
If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this Driver Software].
92
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
7 Finish the installation.
Click [Next] > [Complete] to finish the installation wizard. If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following: Configure TWAIN Driver. (page 101)
93
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Uninstalling Windows Software
Use a web installer to uninstall software. The web installer can be downloaded from the Download Center (https://kyocera.info).
NOTE For details on how to download the web installer, refer to the following: Using the web installer (page 89)
1 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
NOTE Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
2 Display the screen
1 Read the license agreement. 2 Click [Accept] if there is no problem.
3 Click [Uninstall].
94
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4 Uninstall the software.
1 Select software you want to uninstall.
2 Click [Uninstall].
5 Finish uninstalling. Click [Complete]. Restart the system for the uninstall to take effect.
95
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software on a Mac OS Computer
A printer driver can be installed for a Macintosh computer. NOTE
· Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · When installing for a Mac, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL (Aoto)].
[Printer] (page 464) · If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
[Bonjour] (page 388) · In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system. · When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the address bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
96
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
5 Driver tab > "Mac Printer Driver (x.x and later)" An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.
2 Install an application. Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
97
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software. This completes the printer driver installation. If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected. If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
98
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3 Configure the settings
1 Open System Preferences and add the printer.
2 Select [Default], click the item that appears in "Name", and then select the driver.
The selected machine is added.
99
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software NOTE
When using an IP address, select the [IP] and then enter the host name or IP address. "Name" is automatically filled in with the number entered in "Address". Change the settings as required. 3 Select the options equipped with the machine.
100
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Configure TWAIN Driver.
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting". Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. Displays the TWAIN Driver Settings screen.
2 Click [Add].
2 Configure TWAIN Driver.
1 Enter the machine name. 2 Select this machine from the list. 3 Enter the machine's IP addresses or host name. 4 Set units of measurement. 5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
101
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 6 Click [OK]. NOTE When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
3 Finish registering.
NOTE Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
102
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Configure WIA Driver.
Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Click [Search] in taskbar, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears. NOTE For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel], in that order. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click the [Properties] button.
103
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
2 Configure WIA Driver.
1 Click the [Settings] tab. 2 Enter the machine's IP addresses or host name. 3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL. 4 Set units of measurement. 5 Click [OK].
104
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Check the counter
Check the counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Counter] > [OK] key
2 Check the counter Select the item you wish to check, and select the [OK] key.
105
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Administrator Privileges Overview
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator privileges, and another with Administrator privileges. The user with Machine Administrator privileges and the user with Administrator privileges can configure important settings for the machine. The differences in the privileges are as follows: User with Machine Administrator privileges
This user can configure the product's network settings, security settings such as user registration, and the machine's security level. [Data Security] (page 405) User with Administrator privileges This user can configure the product's network settings, and security settings such as user registration. This user cannot set the machine's security level.
106
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator
NOTE
The user with Machine Administrator privileges or the user with Administrator privileges must log in to configure important settings for the product, such as network settings and security settings. The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Machine Administrator User Name Login user name
Login Password
DeviceAdmin ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x
4000
ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x 3500
Default Settings of the Machine (page 64)
Check the label on the main unit for the factory-set initial login password. Location of factory-set initial login password (page 3)
Administrator
User Name Login user name Login Password
Admin Admin Check the label on the main unit for the factory-set initial login password. Location of factory-set initial login password (page 3)
IMPORTANT
To ensure security, be sure to change the factory default user name, login user name, and login password. Also, change your password regularly. Change the user properties (page 488) Three incorrect entries will lock you out. Re-enter your password after a few moments.
107
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Strengthening the Security
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login user name and password. In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this machine to only those who have a registered login name and password. For details, refer to the following: User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 478)
NOTE
This product has an optional security chip called TPM (Trusted Platform Module). The encryption key used to encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.
Restrict the users of the machine
· User Login Overview of User Login Administration (page 479)
· Authentication Security Authentication Security (page 482)
· Auto Panel Reset
Auto Panel Reset (page 440) · ID Card Settings
The optional Card Authentication Kit(B) AC is required. ID Card Settings (page 507)
Restrict the basic functions that can be used
· Local Authoriz. Local Authorization (page 496)
· Group Authorication Setting Group Authorization Settings (page 499)
· Guest Auth. Set. Guest Authorization Settings (page 500)
Output the document stored in the machine at the time when user operates the device via operation panel
· Remote Printing [Remote Operation] (page 413)
Prevent the data stored in the machine from being leaked
· PDF Encryption Functions PDF Encryption Functions (page 327)
108
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Completely delete the data on the machine before disposing of the machine
· DataSanitization [Data Security] (page 405)
Protect the transmission from interception and wiretapping
· IPP over TLS IPP over TLS (page 394)
· HTTPS HTTPS (page 394)
· LDAP Security Command Center RX User Guide
· SMTP Security SMTP (page 393) Command Center RX User Guide
· POP3 POP3 (page 393) Command Center RX User Guide
· FTP Encrypted TX FTP Encrypted TX (page 336)
· EnhancedWSD(TLS) EnhancedWSD(TLS) (page 396)
· IPSec [IPSec] (page 391)
· SNMPv3 SNMPv3 (page 392)
Verify the software in the machine
· Software Verification SW Verification (page 406)
Preventing from execution of the unauthorized programs
· Allowlisting Allowlisting (page 416)
109
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
What is Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX. This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name. Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, you must enter the user name and password and log in. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box, and Settings/Registration on the navigation menu.
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
Item Device Information/ Remote Operation Job Status
Address Book
Device Settings Function Settings Network Settings Security Settings Management Settings
Description The machine's structure can be checked.
Administrator General User
Yes
Yes
Displays all device information, including print
Yes
Yes
and scan jobs, storing jobs, scheduled jobs, and
job log history.
Create, edit, or delete addresses and address
Yes
Yes
groups.
The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the privilege of the user.
Configure the advanced settings of the machine. Yes
No
Configure the advanced function settings.
Yes
No
Configure the network advanced settings.
Yes
No
Configure the security advanced settings.
Yes
No
Configure the advanced management settings. Yes
No
NOTE
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX. Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. FAX Operation Guide
110
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
Accessing Command Center RX
1 Display the screen
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. Example: https://10.180.81.1 (in the case of /IP address) https://MFP001 (if the host name is MFP001)
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status.
NOTE If "There is a problem with this website's security certificate" is displayed, configure the certificate. Command Center RX User Guide You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
2 Configure the settings Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. NOTE To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, you must enter the user name and password and log in. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box, and Settings/Registration on the navigation menu.
111
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
Changing Security Settings
1 Display the screen
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report Print] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 Click [Security Settings].
2 Configure the settings From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
NOTE For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
112
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
Changing Device Information
1 Display the screen
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report Print] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
3 1
2
2 Configure the settings Enter the device information, and then click [Submit]. IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON. To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".
113
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
SMTP and E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. In addition, configure the following. SMTP settings
"SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP" The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
"Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings" The setting to limit the size of E-mails
"E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings" The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
114
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
1 Display the screen Display the SMTP Protocol screen. 1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report Print] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].
115
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
2 Configure the settings Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
3 Display the screen Display the E-mail Settings screen. From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
4 Configure the settings Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items. SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine. [SMTP Protocol] Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that [SMTP Protocol] is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocols] and set the SMTP protocol to [On]. [SMTP Server Name] Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server. Be sure to enter the items. [SMTP Port Number] Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The factory default port number is 25. [SMTP Server Timeout] Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds. 116
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
[Authentication Protocol] To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
[Connection Test] Tests to confirm the proper operation under the settings without sending an email.
[Domain Restrictions] To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 You don't need to set the items when you only use the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set the items if you want to enable the function of receiving e-mail on the machine. Command Center RX User Guide
E-mail Send Settings [E-mail Size Limit] Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is canceled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit. Entering 0 will allow for the sending of E-mail regardless of E-mail size limits. [Sender Address] Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails. Non-delivery report may be sent back to the sender address specified here. It is recommended that you specify an e-mail address that can be received by the device administrator. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256 characters. Be sure to enter the items. [Signature] Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. [SMTP Authentication and Sender Address] Select the information source (quotation destination) for the login user name, password, and sender address used for SMTP authentication and email sending. Select [Use Device Setting] or [Use Login User Information]. [Function Default] Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Defaults] page.
5 Click [Submit].
117
Installing and Setting up the Machine > What is Command Center RX
Registering Destinations
1 Display the screen
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Report Print] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Status Page] > [OK] key > [Yes] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 In the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
5 Click [Add].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Enter the destination information. Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when registering via operation panel. Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 159)
2 Click [Submit].
118
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced. This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). For details on KYOCERA Net Viewer operation, refer to the following: KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing up Address Book Data to PC
1 Start up KYOCERA Net Viewer.
119
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
2 Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the name of the model from which you want to back up the Address Book, and select [Advanced] > [Set mutiple devices].
2 Select [Custom mode] and click [Next].
120
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 3 Select destination device group and click [Next]. 4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
121
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 5 Select [Cleate from device], uncheck [Overwrite settings on target device], and click [Next].
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE If the "Addminisrator login" screen appears, enter the administrator's login user name and password, and then click [OK].
122
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 7 Click [Save to fine].
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save]. Be sure to select "XML file" for "File format".
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
123
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1 Start up KYOCERA Net Viewer. 2 Load the Address Book data.
1 Right-click on the name of the model from which you want to forward the Address Book, and select [Advanced] > [Set mutiple devices].
2 Select [Custom mode] and click [Next].
124
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 3 Select a destination device group and click [Next]. 4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
125
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 5 Select [Create from file], uncheck [Overwrite settings on target device], and click [Next].
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's Address Book from entry No.1. 6 Click [Reference] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next]. 7 Click [Fininsh].
The write process of the Address Book data starts. 8 Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
126
Preparation before Use
3 Preparation before Use
Load paper ...............................................................................................................................128 Paper Stopper ..........................................................................................................................140 Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .....................................141 Registering Destinations in the Address Book ....................................................................159
127
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Load paper
Loading Paper
Load paper in the cassettes and multipurpose tray. For the paper load methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.
1 Cassette 1 Loading in the Cassettes (page 131)
2 Cassette 2 Loading in the Cassettes (page 131)
3 Cassette 3 Loading in the Cassettes (page 131)
4 MultipurposeTray Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 136) NOTE
· The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type (thickness). · Do not use inkjet printer paper or paper with special coatings. (Doing so may lead to failures such as
paper jams.)
128
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface. In addition, note the following points. · If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam. · Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of
problems. Seal any remaining paper in the cassettes back in the paper storage bag. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray in the paper storage bag. · If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. IMPORTANT If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to the following: About Paper (page 767)
129
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Paper Specifications available in the Cassettes
The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The number of sheets that can be loaded in each cassette is shown below.
Cassette
Cassette 1 to 3
250 sheets (Plain paper: 80 g/m2)
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following: Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 768) For the paper type setting, refer to the following: [Media Type Set.] (page 428)
Capacity
IMPORTANT
· Cassettes 1 to 3 can hold 80 to 163 g/m2 of paper. · If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
130
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Loading in the Cassettes
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE If the baseplate is rising, push the baseplate until it locks.
131
Preparation before Use > Load paper
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
IMPORTANT When using Folio, Oficio II, or Legal
2 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
132
Preparation before Use > Load paper
3 Load paper
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing down. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the
cassettes. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator. · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
133
Preparation before Use > Load paper
4 Gently push the cassette back in.
IMPORTANT Push all cassettes all the way in. If they are not pushed all the way in, they may cause a jam.
NOTE There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette. The display changes up and down to match the remaining amount of paper.
5 Specify the type of paper loaded in the cassette using the operation panel.
Loading in the Cassettes (page 131)
134
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Paper Specifications available in the Multipurpose Tray
Up to 100 sheets of Plain paper (80 g/m2) can be added to the multipurpose tray. For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following: Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 768) For the paper type setting, refer to the following: [Media Type Set.] (page 428) Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the paper you are using.
The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows. · Plain paper (80 g/m2): 100 sheets · Thick paper (209 g/m 2): 5 sheets · Thick paper (157 g/m 2): 5 sheets · Thick paper (104.7 g/m 2): 70 sheets · Hagaki (Cardstock): 15 sheets · Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei
2: 55 sheets · Transparencies: 1 sheets
NOTE · When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
Paper Specifications available in the Multipurpose Tray (page 135) · When using special paper such as transparency or thick paper, set the media type. [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
135
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in
136
Preparation before Use > Load paper the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
· If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
· Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
· Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Vertical envelope (open opening) · Horizontal envelope (close opening)
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MF Tray Set.] (page 433)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 138) 137
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type
The default paper size setting for cassette 1, for the multipurpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 to 3) is "A4", and the default media type setting is "Plain". To change the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [ ][ ]keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [ ][ ] keys > Select a cassette
2 Select the cassette size and type
Cassette Paper Size and Media Type
Set the size of paper and Media type used in cassettes.
Item [Paper SizePaper Size]
Description
Select the paper size.
Value (Cassette 1 to 3) [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement-R], [Executive], [OfficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Custom] For custom paper size, set the size for each cassette. Custom PaperSize (page 431)
[Media Type]
Value (Cassette 1 to 3)
[Plain], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
· To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following.
[Media Type Set.] (page 428)
· When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
· To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
138
Preparation before Use > Load paper
Multipurpose Tray Paper Size and Media Type
Set the size of paper and media type used in the multipurpose tray.
Item [Paper Size]
Description
Select the paper size. Value: [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [OfficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Envemope #10], [Envemope #9], [Envemope #6], [Envemope Monarch], [Envemope DL], [Envemope C5], [Cardstock], [Ofuku], [Youkei 4], [Youkei 2], [Custom] For custom paper size, set the size for each cassette.
Custom PaperSize (page 431)
[Media Type]
Select the media type.
Value: [Plain], [Labels], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Cardstock], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Envelope], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following.
[Media Type Set.] (page 428)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
NOTE
The available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. Value: [Plain], [Labels], [Recycled], [Vellum], [Bond], [Color], [Envelope], [Cardstock], [Coated][Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] Fax function is avairable for fax models.
139
Preparation before Use > Paper Stopper
Paper Stopper
When using paper A4/Letter or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
140
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer. Screens of Windows 10 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows.
NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Make a note of the computer name and full computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1 Display the screen Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [System], in that order.
NOTE For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Settings] [System] [About] [Advenced system settings], in that order.
2 Check the information.
Check the computer name and full computer name.
Screen example: Computer name: PC4050 Full computer name: pc4050.abcdnet.com
After checking the computer name, click the
[Close] button to close the "System" screen.
141
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Make a note of the user name and domain name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1 Display the screen Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Command Prompt], in that order. NOTE For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Command Prompt], in that order. The Command Prompt window appears.
2 Check the domain name and user name. At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name. Screen example:
User Name: yamada Domain Name: ABCDNET
142
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer. NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group. 1 For Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View] [Options] [Folder Options], in
that order. For Windows 11, open up a window in File Explorer and select [...] [Options], in that order.
2 Uncheck [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced setting". 3 Click [OK].
1 Create a folder. Create a folder on your computer. For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
143
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Configure permission settings.
1 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, click [Properties] [Sharing] tab, [Advanced Sharing], in that order.
2 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox, and then click the [Permissions] button.
3 Make a note of the Share name.
144
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 4 Click the [Add] button.
5 Specify the location.
1 If the computer name that you made a note is the same as the domain name: If the computer name is not shown in "From this location", click the [Location] button, select the computer name, and click the [OK] button. Example) pc4050 If the computer name that you made a note is not the same as the domain name: If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does not appear in the "Location", click the [Location] button, select the text after the dot (.), and click the [OK] button. Example: abcdnet.com Make a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 141)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK] button. Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a user.
145
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 6 Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 Select the user you entered. 2 Select "Change" checkbox of "Read" and [Change]. 3 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the checkmark of [Allow] of "Read". 7 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
146
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 8 Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
1 Select the [Security] tab. 2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or user names", click [Edit] button to add user in a similar way of "configuration of permission settings". 3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on the [Allow] checkbox for "Modify" and "Read & execute". 4 Click the [Close] button.
147
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Configuring Windows Firewall
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1 Check file and printer sharing.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [System] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall], in that order.
NOTE
· For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button
[All apps] [Windows Tools]
Panel] [System] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall], in that order.
· If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [OK] button.
[Control
2 Select the [File and printer sharing] checkbox.
148
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Add a port.
1 Please select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System Tools] [Control Panel] [System and Scurity] [Check Firewall Status], in that order.
2 Click [Advanced settings].
3 Click [Inbound Rules].
4 Click [Mew Rules].
149
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 5 Select [Port] from the rule.
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter "445" then click [Next].
150
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 7 Select [Allow the connection] and click [Next]. 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
151
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in [Name] and click [Finish].
152
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB
An environment for sending a document to Windows can be set up smoothly by using the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). By operating the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB, you can configure the following settings. · Create a shared folder in a PC for receiving documents:
A new folder can be easily created on the desktop. Also, the newly created folder is automatically set as a shared folder. · Set the created shared folder as an address on this machine: Information about such things as the name of the computer and shared names for the shared folder is easily recorded in the address book of this machine with a sequence of actions. Can also be registered on the One Touch Keys. NOTE · Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. · If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution
authority.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Follow the guidance on the screen to download the Scan to Folder Setup Tool.
153
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 5 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
6 "Utility" > in "Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB" The Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB will be downloaded.
7 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
154
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Configure the settings
1 Select the device to use and click [Next].
NOTE · The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine,
verify that it is connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is turned on and click [Refresh].
· If user administration is valid on this machine, the user authentication screen appears. Log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.
The address book of the device appears.
155
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 2 Click [Add].
NOTE · Clicking on [Edit] after selecting the registered address allows you to change the content of the
registration. · Unchecking the [Show fax-capable addresses] check-box will hide the address containing the fax. 3 Create a new folder.
Select "Creat a new folder on the desktop" and click [OK] to create a new folder on the desktop. (The default folder name is "Scan".)
NOTE · Click [Edit] to change the desktop folder name. · Selecting [Select an existing folder and location] allows you to select an existing folder that is
already set as a shared folder on the PC.
156
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 4 Enter the information requested to register the address.
1 Enter the name for display in the address book. 2 Display the folder name and path to the shared folder. 3 Shared folders can be selected from a PC on the network. 4 Display the user name of the selected PC. 5 Enter the password corresponds to the log in user name of the selected PC. 5 Click [OK] to register the address to the address book. 6 Click [Close]. 7 To register the registered address in a One Touch key, click [Yes].
157
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 8 Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and click [Submit].
9 Click [Close]. 10 Click [Finish] to exit the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB.
158
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax function installed).
NOTE
· Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX. Registering Destinations (page 118)
· Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators. Add One Touch Keys. (page 170)
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE
If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. Edit Restriction (page 473) Command Center RX User Guide
Registering an Address (E-mail Address)
The registering method of an E-mail address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] key > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] key > [Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [ ][ ] key > [Add Address] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] key > [Contacts] > [OK] key
2 Enter an address number. To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto] (000).
NOTE
· Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 300 numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups.
· If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you select [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (000) as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
159
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
3 Add the name.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Contact Name] > [Edit] 2 Enter the destination name for display in the address book and select the [OK] key.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
4 Add the address.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [E-mail Address] > [Edit] 2 Enter the E-mail address and select the [OK] key.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
5 Set an address number
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Address Number] > [Edit] 2 Enter an address number.
The number can be set between 1 and 350. Use the numeric keypad or select the [ ] or [ ] key and enter a number. Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can choose any available number. If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered. 3 Select the [OK] key.
6 Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK] key. The destination is added to the Address Book.
NOTE Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key. Add One Touch Keys. (page 170)
160
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering an Address (Folder (SMB) Address)
The registering method of an folder (SMB) address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Add Address] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Contacts] > [OK] key
2 Add the name.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Contact Name] > [Edit]
2 Enter the destination name for display in the address book and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
3 Add the address.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Folder(SMB)] > [Edit]
2 To directly specify the SMB folder, enter "Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name", and "Login Password". The table below explains the items to be entered. "Host Name" Computer name. Enter "Host Name" or "IP Address". To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]) "Path" Share name For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder "Login User Name" · If the computer name and domain name are the same User Name For example: james.smith. · If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith
161
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book "Login Password" "Login Password" is the Windows logon password (Case sensitive) NOTE · For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
4 Select [Yes] in the connection confirmation screen. The connection will be verified. If you select [No], no confirmation will be made. [Connected. ] appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If [Cannot connect. ] appears, review the entry.
5 Set an address number
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Address Number] > [Edit] 2 Enter an address number.
The number can be set between 1 and 350. Use the numeric keypad or select the [ ] or [ ] key and enter a number. Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can choose any available number. If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered. 3 Select the [OK] key.
6 Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK] key. The destination is added to the Address Book.
162
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering an Address (Folder (FTP) Address)
The registering method of an folder (FTP) address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Add Address] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Contacts] > [OK] key
2 Add the name.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Contact Name] > [Edit]
2 Enter the destination name for display in the address book and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
3 Add the address.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Folder(FTP)] > [Edit]
2 To directly specify the FTP folder, enter "Host Name", "Path", "Login User Name", and "Login Password". The table below explains the items to be entered. "Host Name" Host name or IP address of FTP server To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]) "Path" Path for the file to be stored. For example) ¥User¥scandata If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory. When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash. "Login User Name" FTP server login user name "Login Password" FTP server login password
163
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
4 Select [Yes] in the connection confirmation screen. The connection will be verified. If you select [No], no confirmation will be made. "Connected. " appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot connect. " appears, review the entry. When [SSL] in [Secure Settings] is enabled, is displayed after "Yes" is selected. Select "Yes" to check the connection for FTP encrypted communication. Select "No" to return to the normal connection confirmation screen. "Connected. " appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot connect. " appears, review the entry.
5 Set an address number
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Address Number] > [Edit] 2 Enter an address number.
The number can be set between 1 and 350. Use the numeric keypad or select the [ ] or [ ] key and enter a number. Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can choose any available number. If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered. 3 Select the [OK] key.
6 Check if the destination entry is correct and select the [OK] key. The destination is added to the Address Book.
164
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Add the group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 5050 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, FAX, and a total of 5 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Add Address] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Group] > [OK] key
2 Add the name.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Group Name] > [Edit] 2 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book and select the [OK] key.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
3 Select the members (destinations).
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Group Member] > [Edit] > [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Add Destination] > [OK] key > 2 Select the group you want to add to and select [OK] key.
NOTE You can search by name by selecting [Menu][Search(Furigana)].
3 Select the destination you want to register as a group from the registered individual destinations, and select the key [OK]. The selected destination will be added to the group. To add the destination, repeat steps 3-1 to 3-3.
4 Select the [Back] key.
165
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4 Set an address number
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Number] > [Edit] 2 Enter an address number.
The number can be set between 1 and 350. Use the numeric keypad or select the [ ] or [ ] key and enter a number. Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can choose any available number. If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you select the [OK] key and the number cannot be registered. 3 Select the [OK] key.
5 Select the [OK] key. The group is added to the Address Book.
166
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing Contact Address in Address Book
Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Edit a contact address.
1 Select the destination [Contacts] to edit and select the key. 2 Change [Contact Name], [Furigana], destination type, address, and [Address Number]. For how to
change, refer to the following: Registering an Address (E-mail Address) (page 159) 3 After making changes, press the key >"Yes" Register the changed destination.
167
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing Group Address in Address Book
Edit the destinations (group address) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Edit a destination to a group.
1 Select the group you wish to edit and select the key. 2 Change [Group Name], [Furigana], and [Address Number]. For how to change, refer to the following:
Add the group (page 165) 3 [ ][ ] keys > [Group Member] > [Edit] 4 After making changes, press the key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. 5 If you want to remove a member from a group, select the destination > [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys >
[Delete] > key NOTE
Select the destination and the key shows the detailed information of the selected destination. To add the destination, select [Add Destination]. For how to change, refer to the following: Add the group (page 165)
6 Select [Yes]. 7 After making changes, press the key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
168
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting Address Book Entries
Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select a destination (individual) or group to delete, [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
169
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Add One Touch Keys.
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key.
NOTE · When the Shift Lock light is off, the one-touch keys are numbered 1 to 11. If the shift lock light is on when
you select a key, the one touch keys are numbered 12 to 22.[Shift lock] · Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Choosing from One Touch key destinations (page 252) · You can add One Touch Keys and edit their settings on Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide · If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch
Keys by logging in with administrator privileges. Command Center RX User Guide
1 Select the one touch key to register
1 On the send screen or fax screen, press and hold the one-touch key you want to register. (2.0 seconds or more)
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Key number] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations.
1 Select the destination you want to register to the one-touch key from among the destinations registered in the address book, and then select the key.
2 The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing the Destination to the One Touch Key
1 Select the one touch key you want to change
1 On the send screen or fax screen, press and hold the one-touch key you want to register. (2.0 seconds or more)
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Key number] > [OK] key Select an unregistered One Touch Key number to display the address book. You can register by selecting a destination from the address book.
170
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
2 Edit a contact address.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Edit] > [OK] key NOTE
Selecting [Detail] and the [OK] key shows the detailed information of the selected destination. 2 Specify the destination and the [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
171
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key
1 Select a One Touch Key number to delete.
1 On the send screen or fax screen, press and hold the one-touch key you want to register. (2.0 seconds or more)
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Key number] > [OK] key Select an unregistered One Touch Key number to display the address book. You can register by selecting a destination from the address book.
2 Delete destination
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.
172
Print from PC
4 Print from PC
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ......................................................................................174 Printing from PC ......................................................................................................................178 Printing from the Mobile Device............................................................................................188 Printing Data Saved in the Printer.........................................................................................191 Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)...................................................................208
173
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. Printer Driver User Guide
1 [Quick Print] tab Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
2 [Basic] tab This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, destination, and duplex printing.
3 [Layout] tab This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster printing, and scaling.
4 [Imaging] tab This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
5 [Publishing] tab This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
6 [Job] tab This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.
7 [Advanced] tab This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
8 [Profiles] Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
174
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen 9 [Factory Default]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display Help as explained below.
1 Click the [?] button.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
NOTE The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
175
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows Sever 2016 and later)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when printing. For the settings, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
1 Click the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printer].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preference] button on the [General] tab. 4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
176
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 11)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when printing. For the settings, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
1 Click the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preference] button on the [General] tab. 4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
177
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER. NOTE
· To print the document from applications, install the printer driver downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/) on your computer.
· In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
· When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 136)
Printing on Standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
NOTE Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel. [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
1 Display the screen Click [File] and select [Print].
178
Print from PC > Printing from PC
2 Configure the settings
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Select the [Basic] tab. 3 Click the "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered. Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 180) To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the "Media type" menu and select the media type.
4 Click the [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
179
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the print settings screen of the printer driver. The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel. [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
1 Display the screen
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers]. NOTE
For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers]. 2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver. 3 Click [Basic] in [General].
180
Print from PC > Printing from PC
2 Register the paper size.
1 Click the [Preference] tab.
2 Click the [Paper Sizes] button. 3 Click the [New] button.
4 Enter the paper size. 5 Enter the name of the paper. 6 Click the [Save] button. 7 Click the [OK] button. 8 Click the [OK] button.
181
Print from PC > Printing from PC
3 Display the print settings screen. Click [File] and select [Print].
4 Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Select the [Basic] tab. 3 Click "Paper size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the [Media type] menu and select the media type.
NOTE If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Hagaki] or [Envelope] in the "Media type" menu. 4 Select the paper source in the "Source" menu. 5 Click the [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5 Start printing. Click the [OK] button. 182
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing with Universal Print
Jobs can be printed via the cloud by using the cloud service [Universal Print] provided by Microsoft Corporation. Users authorized in the Azure Active Directory can print to Universal Print ready printers from anywhere.
NOTE · A Microsoft 365 license and an Azure Active Directory account are necessary in order to use Universal
Print. If you do not have one, please obtain these licenses and accounts. · In order to use Universal Print, the following prerequisites need to be met:
· A Universal Print-eligible license must be assigned to the user account used · Printer Administrator or Global Administrator privileges must be assigned to all administrators
Registering the Machine to Universal Print
1 Start up the browser. Specify https: // [Host name] and start Command Center RX.
2 Display the screen [Functions] > [Printer] > "Universal Print Settings" > [Settings]
3 Configure the settings
1 Enter "Remote Printer Name" of "Basic".
NOTE Set the proxy if required. Command Center RX User Guide
2 Click "Universal Print" in [Register]. A Microsoft URL and an access code are displayed.
3 Click the URL and enter the access code obtained in Step 2 > [Next] 4 Log in as Azure administrator.
NOTE Credential is required only when you register for the first time. Click [Approve].
5 Close the Microsoft web page and return to the Command Center RX screen.
183
Print from PC > Printing from PC 6 Click [OK]. Returns to the Universal Print Settings screen. NOTE Once registration is complete, [Register] in "Universal Print" will change to [Unregister], and the expiration date of certificate will be shown. Click [Refresh] if the display remains unchanged. 7 Click [Edit] in "Universal Print Preferences" and copy the unregister URL. 8 Open a new tab in the browser and past the URL. You will be redirected to the Universal Print web page. 9 Click [Printer]. Registered printers are displayed. 10 Check the box for this machine and click [Sharing]. The "Share printer" screen is displayed. 11 Select the users you want to share this machine with from the "Select menber"menu and click the [Share this printer] button. NOTE Enable [Allow to access all menber] to share this machine with all users in your organization. 12 Close the Universal Print web page.
184
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Registering a Shared Printer to a Computer
To use Universal Print, it is necessary to add a shared printer registered with Universal Print to the computer.
1 Login
1 Select the Windows Start button [Settings] [Accounts] [Access work or school], in that order. 2 Confirm that the Azure administrator account name is displayed in [Access work or school], and click it.
NOTE If the Azure administrator account name is not displayed, click [+] (Connect), and use the Azure administrator account name and password to log in.
2 Display the screen Select [Home] [Devices] [Printers and scanners], in that order.
3 Configure the settings
1 Click [Adding Printer or Scanner in Windows]. 2 Select the shared printer and click [Add device].
The shared printer is registered.
185
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Print the Job
1 Display the screen Select [File] and click [Print].
2 Configure the settings
1 Select a registered shared printer from the [Printer]menu and click the [Properteis] button.
2 Set the paper size, printer function, etc., as desired. 3 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
186
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Canceling Printing from a Computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following: NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following: Canceling Jobs (page 231)
1 Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
187
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing from the Mobile Device
This machine supports the AirPrint and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any mobile device or computer without installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later products. To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
188
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance. For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
189
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly on a peer to peer basis. The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal mobile devices. When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection. When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
190
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary. An SD/SDHC Memory Card is required to use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box.
IMPORTANT
SD/SDHC memory cards store unencrypted data. Please be careful when storing sensitive documents.
NOTE
When using the Job Box with an SD/SDHC memory card, set [RAM Disk Mode]to [Off].
If you configure settings in the [Store job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box (memory) and printing can be executed at the machine. To print the job in Job Box, specify the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job, then specify a file within a Box and printing it, using the operation panel. You can print the documents from the following boxes. · Private Print Box
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 193) · Stored Job Box
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 195) · Quick Copy Box
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 198) · Proof and Hold Box
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 200) · PIN Print Box
Printing Documents from PIN Print Box (page 202) · Universal Print Box
Printing the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box (page 205)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job
1 Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print dialog box displays.
2 Click the [ ] button of the Name to select the machine from the list. 3 Click the [Propertites] button.
The Properties dialog box displays.
191
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
4 Click the [Job storage] tab and select the [Job enhancement] check box to set the function. NOTE For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
192
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from Private Print Box
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job from the application software, specify a password in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by entering the password on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Private Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document you wish to print and select [Select] > [OK] key. Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared.
NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key 3 Enter the password > [OK] key 4 Enter the number of copies to print and the [OK] key > [Yes]
Printing starts. Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
193
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Private Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key 3 Enter the password > [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
194
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Stored Job Box
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up a password as necessary. If you set up a password, enter the password when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box/USB] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Private Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared.
NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key
3 Enter the number of copies to print and the [OK] key > [Yes] Printing starts.
NOTE
If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password with the numeric keypad.
Simple Job Printing
When you save a print job performed via user login to the Stored Job Box, logging in with an ID card at the time of printing displays a list of your print jobs in the Stored Job Box. When you run the print job, printing starts immediately. User login administration that uses the optional Card Authenticatiton Kit(B) AC is required. For details on user login administration for printing, refer to the following: Adding a User (Local User List) (page 484) Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC (page 491) For ID card settings, refer to the following: ID Card Settings (page 507) For Simple Job Printing settings, refer to the following:
195
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer Simple Job Printing (page 509)
196
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Private Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The document is deleted. NOTE If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password with the numeric keypad.
197
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE · When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one. · To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Jobs (page 471)
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Quick/Proof] > [OK] key 2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared.
NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key 3 Enter the number of copies to print and the [OK] key > [Yes]
Printing starts.
198
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Quick/Proof] > [OK] key 2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The document is deleted.
199
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Proof and Hold] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key 3 Enter the number of copies to print and the [OK] key > [Yes]
Printing starts.
200
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Proof and Hold] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The document is deleted.
201
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from PIN Print Box
This PIN Print Box holds printing when printing is executed from applications that use the IPP protocol, such as AirPrint and Mopria. A pending print job can be output by entering the PIN code that was set at the time of printing.
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [PIN Print] > [OK] key 2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print and > [Select] > [OK] key 2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key 3 Enter the PIN code to print, and [OK] key > [Yes]
Printing starts. Upon completion of printing, the PIN Print job is automatically deleted.
202
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the PIN Print Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [PIN Print] > [OK] key 2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [Select] > [OK] key 2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key 3 Enter the PIN code to print, and [OK] key > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
203
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Universal Print Box
For added security, Universal Print can set a PIN code for the printing jobs. Jobs with a PIN code will be saved in the cloud without being printed. By entering the PIN code from the operation panel, jobs from this machine can be printed.
NOTE · To use Universal Print, this machine must be registered as a shared printer.
Registering the Machine to Universal Print (page 183) · To use the Universal Print box, you need a Windows 11 and Microsoft 365 license and an Azure Active
Directory account.
Storing a Job in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen Click [File] and select [Print].
2 Configure the settings
1 Select a registered shared printer from the "Printer"menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Click [Advanced settings]. 3 Set [PIN-protetcted printing] to [On], and set a PIN code (4 digits) as the [PIN-protected printing PIN]. 4 Select the [OK] button > the [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
204
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Universal Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Details]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key > Enter the PIN code > [OK] key > [Yes]
205
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen
1 [Document Box] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Universal Print] > [OK] key
2 Select the creator of the document, and select the [OK] key.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete and [Select] > [OK] key Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > Enter the PIN code > [OK] key > [Yes] The document is deleted.
206
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Job Box Settings
Configure settings for Job Box.
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key >[ ] key > [Document Box] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Job Box] > [Quick Copy Jobs] or [JobRet. Deletion]
2 Configure the settings Configurable items are as follows: [Quick Copy Jobs] To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Value: number between 0 and 300 NOTE When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
[JobRet. Deletion] This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time. Value: [Off], [1 hour], [4 hours], [1 day], [1 week] NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
[Storage Media] Set the save destination of Job Box. Displayed when the optional SD card is installed. Value:
207
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function. NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below. · KX DRIVER is installed. · Either [Enhanced WSD] or [EnhancedWSD(TLS)] is enabled.
[ProtocolSettings] (page 392)
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
208
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor. Exit manually
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor. Exit automatically
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
209
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Quick View State
The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
1 Printing progress tab 2 Paper tray status tab 3 Toner Status Tab 4 Alert tab 5 Expand button 6 Settings icon Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
210
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Printing progress tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
1 Status icon 2 Job list Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
211
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Paper tray status tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
212
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
213
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
214
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
Command Center RX If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB connection. Command Center RX User Guide
[Notification...] This sets the display of the Status Monitor. Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 216)
[www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com] Open our website.
[Exit] Exits the Status Monitor.
215
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Notification Settings
The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1 Select "Enable event notification". If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is executed.
2 Select an event to use with the text to speech function in Available events. 3 Click the "Sound file / Text to Speech" field.
216
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
NOTE The available file format is WAV. When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
217
Operation on the Machine
5 Operation on the Machine
Loading Originals ....................................................................................................................219 Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1) ..............................................................224 Copying ..................................................................................................................................... 230 Basic Scanning (Sending)........................................................................................................232 Sending Document via E-mail ................................................................................................233 Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................234 Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ...........................................236 Scanning using TWAIN or WIA...............................................................................................238 Useful Sending Method ..........................................................................................................239 WSD Scan..................................................................................................................................240 Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)................................................243 Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself).............................245 Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) .....................................................................246 Canceling Sending Jobs ..........................................................................................................248 Handling Destination ..............................................................................................................249 How to use the FAX Function .................................................................................................257 Using Document Boxes ..........................................................................................................258 Using Removable USB Drive ..................................................................................................261 Cloud Linkage Function ..........................................................................................................267
218
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function. Platen
Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes. Document Processor
Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.*1 *1Available only on the models with a duplex scanning function.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Size (page 284)
Placing Envelopes or Cardstock on the Platen
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
219
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
2 Align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following: Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 136) CAUTION Do not leave the Document Processor open. Doing so may cause injury. IMPORTANT · Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. · When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
220
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Original Specifications available in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned.
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Item
Description
Thickness Size No. of sheets
50 to 160g/m2 (duplex:*1 50 to 160 g/m2) Applicable to MFP 100 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm 50 sheets (80 g/m2) maximum
*1Available only on the models with a duplex scanning function.
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the document processor may become dirty. · Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.) · Originals with adhesive tape or glue · Originals with cut-out sections · Curled original · Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.) · Carbon paper · Crumpled paper
Loading Originals in the document processor
IMPORTANT
· Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
· Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
221
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
1 Open the document tray and adjust the document width guide to the document size.
2 Load paper.
1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up.
NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Orig.Orientation (page 289)
IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
222
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam. Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed with the punched holes or perforated lines facing forward (so that they will be scanned last).
2 Open the original stopper. (If the original size is Folio/Legal)
223
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
You can combine frequently used functions and register them as a program. After registration, you can call up simply by selecting one of [Program 1]to [Program 4]. [Program 1] is preset with the ID card copy function. Using this function, you can copy the front and back sides of documents up to A5/Statement size, such as ID cards, onto one side. Overwriting will delete the settings, but you can use the [Function Menu] key to restore the same settings. · Paper selection Cassette 1 · Zoom (XY Zoom): 100% · Combine: 2 in 1 · Original Size: A5/Statement · Continuous loading: Configure the settings
NOTE · Copy, send, and fax functions can be registered in the program. · If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator
privileges.
Register the program
1 Configure the settings Configure the printing function to be registered in the program. For details on each function, see below: Using Various Functions (page 274)
NOTE For sending or faxing, you can also register destinations in the program.
224
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
2 Register the program Among the [Program 1]to [Program 4] keys, press and hold the key whose settings you want to register for at least 2 seconds. The current settings will be registered to the selected program key.
225
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
Recall the program
1 Select the key in which the setting you want to recall is registered from among the [Program 1]to [Program 4] keys. The settings of various functions will be replaced with the registered settings.
2 Place the originals and press the [Start] key.
226
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
Overwrite the program
1 Configure the settings Set the function you want to change. For details on each function, see below: Using Various Functions (page 274) NOTE For sending or faxing, you can also register destinations in the program.
2 overwrite the program
1 Among the [Program 1]to [Program 4] keys, press and hold the key you want to change for at least 2 seconds.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Overwrite] > [OK] key > [Yes] Register the changed program.
227
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
Delete the program
1 Display the screen Among the [Program 1]to [Program 4] keys, press and hold the key you want to delete for at least 2 seconds.
2 Delete the program [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes]
228
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Program 1)
Selection key settings
Frequently used functions can be registered on the selection keys. You can easily set it by selecting the selection key. You can register functions to selection keys from the System Menu. Copy (page 463) Send (page 467) Document Box (page 471)
229
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Copy
1 Select the key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
Select the original size and paper size. NOTE
For the procedure for specifying an original size, refer to the following. Original Size (page 284) For the procedure for specifying a paper source, refer to the following. Paper Selection (page 285)
3 Configure the settings Select the [Function Menu] key to set paper selection, reduction/enlargement, etc. Copy (page 276)
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Specify the desired number up to 999.
5 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins. 230
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Canceling Jobs
1 Select the key with the copy screen displayed. 2 Cancel a job.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Cancel Print Job] > [OK] key 2 Select the job to cancel, and select [Menu]. 3 [ ] [ ] keys > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key
NOTE Select [Detail], and the [OK] key and detailed information of the job is displayed. 4 Select [Yes]. The job is canceled.
NOTE A job in the middle of scanning can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel] key.
231
Operation on the Machine > Basic Scanning (Sending)
Basic Scanning (Sending)
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available. · Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 233)
· Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 234)
· Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 236)
· Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 238)
NOTE · Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 243) · The fax function can be used for sending.
Fax function is avairable for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
232
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail
NOTE · When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
[Primary Network] (page 402) · Before sending the scanned document with an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the
Command Center RX. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
1 Select the key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
3 [ ][ ] keys > [E-mail] > [OK] key 4 Enter address > [OK] key
Up to 128 characters can be entered. Character Entry (page 759) To enter multiple destinations, select the [Destination] key and enter the next destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
5 Configure the settings Select the [Function Menu] key and set the sending function to use. Send (page 278)
6 Press the key. Sending starts.
233
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer. NOTE
· When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance. [Primary Network] (page 402)
· Before sending the scanned document to the shared folder on your computer, you must configure the following settings: · Make a note of the computer name and full computer name Make a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 141) · Make a note of the user name and domain name Make a note of the user name and domain name (page 142) · Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name (page 143) · Configure the Windows firewall Configuring Windows Firewall (page 148)
1 Select the key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
3 [ ][ ] keys > [Folder(SMB)] > [OK] key
234
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
4 Enter the destination details. Enter each item and select the [OK] key. The table below explains the items to be entered. Enter each item and select the [OK] key.
Item
Description
Host Name Path Login User Name
Login Password
Computer name Limited character count: 64 characters or less
Share name Limited character count: 128 characters or less For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder
· If the computer name and domain name are the same User Name For example: james.smith.
· If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Limited character count: 64 characters or less
Logon password. Limited character count: 64 characters or less Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
A host name can also specify a Port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon. "Host name: Port number" or "IP address: Port number" To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445) If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
5 Check the information. The confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] to check the connection. Select [No] to not confirm. If the connection is successful, [Connected. ] is displayed. If [Cannot connect. ] is displayed, review the entered items. To add the destination, repeat steps 3-4. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
6 Configure the settings Select the [Function Menu] key and set the sending function to use. Send (page 278)
7 Press the key. Sending starts.
235
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
NOTE · Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
[ProtocolSettings] (page 392)
1 Select the key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
3 [ ][ ] keys > [Folder(FTP)] > [OK] key 4 Enter the destination details.
Enter the destination information. Enter each item and select the [OK] key. Character Entry (page 759) The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item Host Name Path
Login User Name Login Password
Description
Host name or IP address of FTP server Limited character count: 64 characters or less Path for the file to be stored Limited character count: 128 characters or less For example: User\ScanData If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory. FTP server login user name Limited character count: 64 characters or less FTP server login password Limited character count: 64 characters or less Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
236
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) A Host Name name can also be specified with a port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon. "Host Name: Port number" or "IP Address: Port number" To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::1]21) If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 21. When path is for a FTP server based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
5 Check the information. The confirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes] to confirm the connection. Select [No] to not confirm. If the connection is successful, "Connected. " is displayed. If "Cannot connect. " is displayed, review the entered items. To add the destination, repeat steps 3-4. Destinations can be changed later.
6 Configure the settings Select the [Function Menu] key and set the sending function to use. Send (page 278) Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
7 Press the key. Sending starts.
237
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way. NOTE
· Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured. Configure TWAIN Driver. (page 101) Configure WIA Driver. (page 103)
1 Display the screen
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software. 2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
2 Configure the settings Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens. NOTE For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
3 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
4 Scan the originals. Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned. 238
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method
You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods. WSD Scan
Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. Executing WSD scan (page 242) Scanning using the fax server You can send a scanned document via a fax server. Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) (page 246) Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation. Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 243) Send to Me (Email) Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled. Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself) (page 245)
239
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. NOTE
· To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is networkconnected, and [WSD-SCAN] is set to [OnOn] in the network settings. WSD-SCAN (page 395)
· For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
· When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance. [Primary Network] (page 402)
Install the Driver (for Windows 10)
1 Right-click the Windows [Control Panel] button and select [Start] [Devices and Printers].
2 Install the driver. Click [Add a device]. Select the icon that displays the machine model name, and click [Next]. When the machine model icon is displayed as a "Printer" on the "Devices and Printers" screen, installation is complete.
240
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
Install the Driver (for Windows 11)
1 Click the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
2 Install the driver. Click [Add a device]. Select the icon that displays the machine model name, and click [Next]. When the machine model icon is displayed as a "Printer" on the "Devices and Printers" screen, installation is complete.
241
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
Executing WSD scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
1 Select the key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
3 Display the screen [ ][ ] keys > [WSD Scan] > [OK] key
4 Scan the originals. For procedure with scanning using this machine, refer to step 4 in 1 step. For procedure from your computer, refer to step 6 in step 5. 1 [ ][ ] keys > [From Oper. Panel] > [OK] key 2 Select the destination computer, and select the [OK] key. You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [Detail]. 3 Select the [Function Menu] key and configure the settings for functions. 4 Press the [Start] key. WSD compatible software installed on the computer starts during sending, and when sending is completed, the file can be confirmed. 5 [ ][ ] keys > [From Computer] > [OK] key 6 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
242
Operation on the Machine > Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
You can specify destinations combining E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), and fax numbers. This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 5050 However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options. · E-mail and fax: Up to 100100 in total · Folders (SMB, FTP): Total of 55 SMB and FTP Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the key to start transmission to all destinations at one time.
NOTE · If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white. · If is set to , multiple destinations cannot be entered.
[Send] (page 467)
Sending to different types of destinations
1 Select the [Send] key 2 Load paper. 3 Specify the recipient. 4 Configure the settings
Select the [Function Menu] key and set the sending function to use.
243
Operation on the Machine > Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
5 Press the key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 254)
6 Press the key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen. After confirming the message, select [Next] and press the [Start] key. Sending starts.
244
Operation on the Machine > Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself)
Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself)
Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
1 Configure the settings. Before using this function, an E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 484) NOTE When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
2 [Send] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Me(E-mail)] > [OK] key
245
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
You can send a scanned document via a fax server. NOTE
· A fax server is required to use this function. For information about the fax server, contact the applicable administrator.
· FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide [FAX Server Set.] (page 411)
1 Select the [Send] key 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
3 [ ][ ] keys > [FAX Server] > [OK] key 4 Enter the recipient information.
When entering directly 1 [ ][ ] keys > [FAX No. Entry] > [OK] key 2 Enter the fax number > [OK]
NOTE · Use the numeric keys to enter a number. · When selecting [On] for [Check New Dest.], the re-entering screen for the destination
information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 255) Destinations can be changed later.
246
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
5 Checking and Editing Destinations Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253) NOTE When selecting the information from the Address Book, select [Address Book], and select the [Destination] > [OK] key. Choosing from the Address Book (page 250)
NOTE When selecting the information from the External Address Book, select [Ext Address Book], and select the [Destination] > [OK] key. For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
6 Configure the settings Select the [Function Menu] key and set the sending function to use. Send (page 278)
7 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting [Check beforeSend], the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 254)
8 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen if more than one destination is specified. After confirming the message, select [Next] and press the [Start] key. Sending starts.
247
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs
1 Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed. The [Job Cancel List] screen is displayed. NOTE Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
2 Cancel a job.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Cancel Send Job] > [OK] key 2 Select the job to cancel, and select [Menu]. 3 [ ] [ ] keys > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key
NOTE Select [Detail], and the [OK] key and detailed information of the job is displayed. 4 Select [Yes]. The job is canceled.
NOTE A job in the middle of scanning can be canceled by selecting the [Stop] key or [Cancel].
248
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly: · Choosing from the Address Book
Choosing from the Address Book (page 250) · Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide · Choosing from One Touch key destinations Choosing from One Touch key destinations (page 252) · Choosing from the FAX Fax function is avairable for fax models. FAX Operation Guide NOTE · You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Default Screen (page 425) · If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the
other party number using the numeric keypad.
249
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from the Address Book
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following: Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 159)
1 In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book] key 2 Select the destinations.
1 [ ][ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
NOTE For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
2 Specify the destination.
NOTE To check detailed information about the selected destination, press [Menu] > [Detail] > [OK] key
3 Enter the recipient information. Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. 1 [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Search(Furigana)] > [OK] key 2 Use the numeric keys to enter a number.
IMPORTANT For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
3 Select the [OK] key. The searched destination is displayed.
4 Select the [OK] key To add the destination, repeat steps 1-4. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be sent. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
250
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from the External Address Book
NOTE For details on the External Addresses, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen
1 In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book] key > [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [Switch Addr Book] > [OK] key
2 [ ][ ] keys > Select Extended Address > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations.
1 Specify the destination. NOTE
To check detailed information about the selected destination, press [Menu] > [Detail] > [OK] key
3 Enter the recipient information. A destination can be searched for by Name. 1 [Menu] > [ ][ ] key > [Search(Furigana)] > [OK] key 2 Use the numeric keys to enter a number. For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
4 Select the [OK] key To add the destination, repeat steps 1-4. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be sent. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
251
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from One Touch key destinations
In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered. NOTE
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered. For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following: Add One Touch Keys. (page 170) To select one-touch keys 12 to 22, you must select the [Shift lock] key to light the [Shift lock] lamp, and then select the one-touch key. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 253)
252
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Checking and Editing Destinations
1 Display the screen Specify the destination. Specifying Destination (page 249)
2 Check and edit the destination. Select the [Destination] key. Enter the recipient information. 1 Select [Add]. 2 Select the destination you wish to add, and select the [OK] key. Specifying Destination (page 249) Edit a contact address. 1 Select the destination you wish to change, and select the [OK] key. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key 3 Edit Destination > [OK] key Specifying Destination (page 249)
NOTE For more information on changing destinations registered in the address book or One Touch keys, refer to the following: Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167) Editing the Destination to the One Touch Key (page 170)
Delete destination 1 Select the destination you wish to delete, and select the [OK] key. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > "Yes "
3 Select [Exit]
NOTE If [Check beforeSend] is set to [OnOn], the confirmation screen appears when the [Start] key is pressed. Check beforeSend (page 467) Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 254)
253
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When "Check beforeSend" is set to [On], the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the [Start] key. Check beforeSend (page 467)
1 Confirmation Screen of Destinations To view detailed information about a destination, select the destination and press [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Detail] > [OK] key If you want to delete a destination, select the destination and press [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The destination is deleted.
2 Select [Next].
NOTE Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot select [Next] unless you have confirmed all destination.
254
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Re-entering the New Destination
When selecting On for "Check New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Enter the same destination information again, and select the [OK] key.
255
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Recall
I tried sending a message, but the other party did not respond. I want to send it to the same destination again. In such a case, by selecting the [Address Recall/Pause] key, you can recall the most recently sent destination to the destination list.
1 Select the [Address Recall/Pause] key The previous destination is displayed on the destination list. NOTE When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.
2 Press the [Start] key. Sending starts. NOTE · If "Check beforeSend" is set to "On", the destination confirmation screen appears when the [Start] key is pressed. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 254) · Recall information is canceled in the following conditions. · When you turn the power off · When you send a next image (new recall information is registered) · When you log out
256
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function
On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. Fax function is avairable for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
257
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes
Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users. The following types of document boxes are available: · Job Box · USB Drive Box · Fax Memory RX Box (only for fax-compatible models) · Subaddress Communication Box (only for fax-compatible models) · Polling Box (only for fax-compatible models)
What is Job Box?
Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", and "PIN Print Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE · An SD/SDHC Memory Card is required to use the Stored Job Box and the Quick Copy Box. · You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
JobRet. Deletion (page 471) · For details on operating the "Private Print/Job Hold Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", or "PIN Print
Box", refer to the following: Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 191)
IMPORTANT SD/SDHC memory cards store unencrypted data. Please be careful when storing sensitive documents.
258
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
What is USB Drive Box?
A USB drive can be connected to the USB drive slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data directly from the USB drive without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB drive in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
259
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
What is a Fax Memory RX Box/Subaddress Box/Polling Box?
Fax Box store the fax data. Fax function is avairable for fax models. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
260
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Using Removable USB Drive
Plugging USB drive directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB drive without having to use a computer. The following file types can be printed: · PDF file (Version 1.7/2.0 or older) · TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) · JPEG file · XPS file · OpenXPS file · Encrypted PDF file In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB drive connected to the machine. The following file formats can be stored: · PDF file · TIFF file · JPEG file · XPS file · OpenXPS file · High-compression PDF file format
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive
NOTE · PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf). · Use USB drive properly formatted by this machine. · Plug the USB drive directly into the USB Drive Slot.
1 Insert the USB drive Plug the USB drive into the USB Drive Slot.
2 Display the screen [Document Box/USB] key > [ ][ ] keys > [USB Drive] > [OK] key
261
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
3 Print the document.
1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and select the [OK] key. You can display up to the third level, including the root directory. NOTE · 1,000 documents can be displayed. · To return to a higher level folder, select [Back].
2 Select the document you wish to print and select [Select] key. Select a document and a checkmark will appear on the right side of the selected document. If you select a document marked with a checkmark and once again select [Select], the selection will be cleared. NOTE If you select [Menu], you can perform the following operations. · [Select All]: Select all documents. · [Clear All]: Deselect all documents. · [Detail]: Display the details for the selected document. · [USB Drive Detail]: Display the details of the USB device. · [Remove USB Drive]: Remove the USB memory.
3 [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] key 4 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.
For the functions that can be set, refer to the following: USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 281) 5 Press the [Start] key. Printing of the selected document begins.
262
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB)
You can store scanned documents to a removal USB drive. NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
1 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 219)
2 Insert the USB Drive Plug the USB drive into the USB Drive Slot.
3 Display the screen [Document Box/USB] key > [ ][ ] keys > [USB Drive] > [OK] key
263
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
4 Store the document.
1 Select the folder where the file will be stored, and select the [OK] key. You can display up to the third level, including the root directory.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Store File] > [OK] key 3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the functions that can be set, refer to the following: USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 281) 4 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB drive.
264
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Check the USB Drive Information
1 Display the screen [Document Box/USB] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [USB Drive] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [USB Drive Detail] > [OK] key
2 Check the information. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. Confirm the information and select the [OK] key.
265
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Removing USB Drive
IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB drive.
1 Display the screen [Reset] key > [ ][ ] keys > [USB Drive] > [OK] key
2 Select Remove. [Menu] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Remove USB Drive] > [OK] key
3 Removing USB Drive When "USB Drive can be safely removed. " is displayed, select [OK] then remove the USB drive. NOTE USB drive can also be removed via Device Status Confirmation. Check the device information (page 361)
266
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Cloud Linkage Function
Use Kyocera Cloud Access to link the cloud service (Google Drive) this machine. You can save scanned documents to a folder in the cloud service and print files in the cloud service. Access the cloud service in advance, upload the file you want to print, and create a destination folder. This section explains procedures for individual users who do not need administrator rights to use the cloud integration function as an example. The action is as follows:
1 Set up files and folders in a cloud service. 2 Install Kyocera Cloud Access. 3 Set Kyocera Cloud Access user account (authentification information). 4 Link with the cloud service. 5 Scan and print through the cloud service.
NOTE For procedures for users who require administrator privileges to use the cloud linkage function, refer to the following: Kyocera Cloud Access User Guide
Set up files and folders in a cloud service.
Before using the cloud linkage function, please do the following preparations in the cloud service:
1 Upload the file you want to print. 2 Create a destination folder.
267
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Installing Kyocera Cloud Access
IMPORTANT Depending on the usage environment, the installation may take some time to complete. Do not force a termination during the installation.
1 Downloading Installer Downloading and installing from the website (page 87)
2 Click the installer. The installer will start up.
3 Select the setup language > [OK] 4 Scroll and confirm the license agreement and select [Accept] > [Next]. 5 Select [Next] in the "Information" screen.
The "Information" screen displays additional components that will be installed on the computer.
6 Select [Next] without checking [Manage settings as an admininstrator.].
NOTE To manage Kyocera Cloud Access as an administrator for your organization or team, select this setting. Kyocera Cloud Access User Guide
7 Select [Install]. Installation of the application begins.
8 Select [Restart computer now], then select [Finish].
268
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Set Kyocera Cloud Access user account (authorization information).
Set the Kyocera Cloud Access user authorization information to link with the cloud.
1 Double-click the Kyocera Cloud Access icon. The browser launches and the Kyocera Cloud Access setup screen appears.
NOTE You can also display the setup screen by entering the following URL in a browser. https://kyoceracloudaccess.com:11022/
2 Select [Start]. 3 Set Kyocera Cloud Access account (authorization information).
Enter the following information: · User Name · Name · E-mail Address · Password
NOTE Enter a new security password of 8 or more characters and symbols. You can include symbols.
4 Select [Generate PIN]. A 6-digit PIN code will be generated, so please write it down.
5 Select a question from the [Security Question] drop-down list and enter your answer. This information is used to verify the user identity and recover the password.
NOTE [Security Question] is only applicable for non-administrator.
6 Select [Next]. Advances to the proxy setting screen.
269
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
7 Enter the address and port of the proxy server > [Next] Check it from your browser. If you do not know them, please contact your provider. NOTE The same username and password as those set in the previous step are displayed.
8 Confirm the printer that you want to link with the cloud service, and select [Connect].
9 Select [Finish] and then "Sign in".
270
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Linkage with the Cloud Service
Link Kyocera Cloud Access account with the cloud service and set up the folders and files you want to use.
1 Select [Add] in the "Linked Cloud Service Acount" screen. 2 Select [Google Drive] in the "Select your cloud service" screen. 3 Select [Connect to Google]. 4 On the "Sign in" screen, select the user (e-mail address) of the cloud service. 5 Enter the password > [Next] > [Continue]
Go to the screen to link with the cloud service to be used.
6 Select [Set up folders and files]. 7 Select [Add folder]. 8 Select the destination folder for scanned data created on the cloud service >
[Select] > [Next]
9 Select the file you want to print from the files uploaded to the cloud service > [Select]
NOTE · Printable file formats are JPEG, PDF, and TIFF. · To print multiple files, select them while pressing and holding [Shift].
10 Confirm that printable files are displayed > [Finish]
NOTE You can add, edit, and delete scanned folders and printable files. Select [Home], and then select [Setup] of the email address. Select "Scan Destinations" and "Printable Files" tabs, set them, and then select [Save].
This completes the operation of the cloud service linkage in Kyocera Cloud Access. Next, use the operation panel to link this machine with the could service via the Kyocera Cloud Access and perform scan/print operations.
271
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Scan and Print using the Cloud Service
Print a file on the cloud service
1 Display the screen If [Cloud Access] is displayed on the Home screen, this step is not necessary. 1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Cloud Access Setting] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [Cloud Access] > [ ][ ] key > [On] > [OK] key 3 [Interface Settings] > [ ][ ] keys > [Connection List] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Off] > [OK] key
2 Log in to the cloud service from this machine 1 [Document Box/USB] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Cloud Access] > [OK] key The connection list appears. 2 [ ][ ] key > Select a connection name from the connection list > [OK] key 3 Enter your user ID and password to connect to [Cloud Access] > [Login]
NOTE You can also select [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [PIN Login] and enter the PIN code created when you set up Kyocera Cloud Access account.
3 Print a file in Google Drive 1 [Google Drive] > [OK] 2 In the search screen, search for the file you want to print.
NOTE Entering a part of the name and selecting [OK] displays the applicable folder or file.
3 Select file to print > [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [Print] > [OK] 4 [Function Menu] key > Select and set print functions as needed > [Exit]
4 Press the [Start] key. Printing begins.
272
Operation on the Machine > Cloud Linkage Function
Scan and send files to the cloud service
1 Display the screen If [Cloud Access] is displayed on the Home screen, this step is not necessary. 1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Cloud Access Setting] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [Cloud Access] > [ ][ ] key > [On] > [OK] key 3 [Interface Settings] > [ ][ ] keys > [Connection List] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Off] > [OK] key
2 Log in to the cloud service from this machine 1 [Document Box/USB] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Cloud Access] > [OK] key The connection list appears. 2 [ ][ ] key > Select a connection name from the connection list > [OK] key 3 Enter your user ID and password to connect to Cloud Access > [Login]
NOTE You can also select [Menu] > [ ][ ] keys > [PIN Login] and enter the PIN code created when you set up Kyocera Cloud Access account.
3 Send a file to a folder in Google Drive 1 [Google Drive] > [OK]
NOTE You can search for the target folder on the search screen.
2 Select the file to send > [Menu] > [Send] 3 Select and set send functions as needed.
4 Press the [Start] key. Sending starts.
273
Using Various Functions
6 Using Various Functions
About Functions Available on the Machine..........................................................................275 Functions ..................................................................................................................................284
274
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
Select a function menu.
Select the [Function Menu] key will allow you to configure the settings for functions. Select a function menu. (page 275)
1 Display the function menu. 2 Select the displayed item or change the value. 3 Confirm the selected settings. 4 Cancels the current settings and returns to the next level up.
275
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Copy
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Paper Selection] [Collate] [ID Card Copy]
[Duplex] [Zoom] [Combine] [Border Erase] [Original Size] [Orig.Orientation] [Mixed Size Orig.] [Original Image] [Density] [EcoPrint] [Continuous Scan] [File Name Entry]
Description
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. Paper Selection (page 285)
Prints the output by page or set. Collate (page 290)
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet. ID Card Copy (page 291)
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals. Duplex (When copying) (page 313)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Zoom (When copying) (page 303)
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. Combine (page 306)
Erases the black borders that form around the image. Border Erase (page 309)
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 284)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Orig.Orientation (page 289)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Orig. (page 287)
Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 293)
Adjust density. Density (page 292)
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. EcoPrint (page 295)
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 316)
Name a document. File Name Entry (page 318)
276
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [JobFinish Notice] [Print Override] [Sharpness] [Contrast]
[Backgrnd Density] [Prevent Bleed-t]
[Erase Colors] [Skip Blank Page]
Description
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. JobFinish Notice (page 317)
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. Priority Override (page 319)
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 297)
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 301)
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. Backgrnd Density (page 298)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-t (page 300)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 302)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 321)
277
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Send
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Color Selection] [Original Size] [Original Image] [Scan Resolution] [Sending Size] [Border Erase] [Zoom] [Orig.Orientation]
[Mixed Size Orig.]
[Continuous Scan]
[File Format]
[File Name Entry] [Subject] [JobFinish Notice] [FAX Resolution]
Description
Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 296)
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 284)
Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 293)
Select fineness of scanning resolution. Scan Resolution (page 333)
Select size of image to be sent. Sending SizeSending Size (page 323)
Erases the black borders that form around the image. Border Erase (page 309)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Zoom (When printing/sending/storing) (page 305)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Orig.Orientation (page 289)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Orig. (page 287)
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 316)
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. File Format (page 325)
Name a document. File Name Entry (page 318)
Adds subject and body when sending a document. Subject/Body (page 335)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. JobFinish Notice (page 317)
Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
278
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [FAX Delayed TX] [FAX Direct TX] [FAX RX Polling]
[FAX TX Report] [Density] [Clarify Text]
[Duplex] [FTP Encrypted TX] [File Separation] [Sharpness] [Contrast] [Backgrnd Density] [Saturation] [Prevent Bleed-t] [Erase Colors]
Description
Set a send time. Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory. Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling Transmission stored in the polling box. Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
Print a report of fax transmission results. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Adjust density. Density (page 292)
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Clarify Text (Noise Removal) (page 334)
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. Duplex (page 322)
Encrypts images when sending via FTP. FTP Encrypted TX (page 336)
Creates a file for each scanned original data page and sends the files. File Separation (page 332)
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 297)
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 301)
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. Backgrnd Density (page 298)
Adjust the color saturation of the image. Saturation (page 299)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-t (page 300)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 302)
279
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [FoldingDetection]
[Skip Blank Page] [EmailEncryptedTX] [DigitalSignature]
Description
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected. FoldingDetection (page 320)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and sends only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 321)
Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate. EmailEncryptedTX (page 337)
Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate. DigitalSignature (page 338)
280
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)
For details on each function, see below: USB Drive (Store File) (page 281) USB Drive (Printing Documents) (page 283)
USB Drive (Store File)
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Color Selection] [Original Size] [Original Image] [Scan Resolution] [Storing Size] [Border Erase] [Zoom] [Orig.Orientation]
[Mixed Size Orig.]
[Continuous Scan]
[File Format] [File Separation] [File Name Entry] [JobFinish Notice]
Description
Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 296)
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 284)
Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 293)
Select fineness of scanning resolution. Scan Resolution (page 333)
Select size of image to be stored. Storing Size (page 340)
Erases the black borders that form around the image. Border Erase (page 309)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Zoom (When printing/sending/storing) (page 305)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Orig.Orientation (page 289)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Orig. (page 287)
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 316)
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. File Format (page 325)
Creates a file for each scanned original data page and sends the files. File Separation (page 332)
Name a document. File Name Entry (page 318)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. JobFinish Notice (page 317)
281
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
[Density]
Function
[Clarify Text]
[Duplex] [Sharpness] [Contrast] [Backgrnd Density] [Saturation] [Prevent Bleed-t]
[Erase Colors] [Skip Blank Page]
Description
Adjust density. Density (page 292)
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Clarify Text (Noise Removal) (page 334)
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. Duplex (page 322)
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 297)
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 301)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 302)
Adjust the color saturation of the image. Saturation (page 299)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. Prevent Bleed-t (page 300)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 302)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and stores only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 321)
282
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
USB Drive (Printing Documents)
Function [Paper Selection]
[Collate] [Duplex] [File Name Entry] [JobFinish Notice] [EcoPrint] [Print Override] [Encrypted PDF] [JPEG/TIFF Print] [XPS FitTo Page]
Description
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. Paper Selection (page 285)
Prints the output by page or set. Collate (page 290)
Print a document to 1-side or 2-sides. Duplex (USB drive) (page 315)
Name a document. File Name Entry (page 318)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. JobFinish Notice (page 317)
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. EcoPrint (page 295)
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. Priority Override (page 319)
Enter the password you set to print the PDF data. Encrypted PDF (page 341)
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. JPEG/TIFF Print (page 342)
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. XPS FitTo Page (page 343)
283
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
,
,
Original Size
,
,
Specify the original size to be scanned.
Value
Description
Auto (standard size)*1, Auto (non-standard size), A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, postcard, return postcard, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom*2
Select from standard sizes and custom sizes.
*1: It is displayed when [Detect Std.Size] of [Common Settings] > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [Detect Orig.(DP)] > [Auto Detect] is set to [On].
Detect Std.Size (page 431)
*2: It can only be placed in the document processor.
NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
284
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
,
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. If [Auto] is selected, paper the same size as the original is automatically selected.
NOTE
· Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette. [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
· Cassettes after Cassette 2 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To change the paper size and media type of the multipurpose tray, select [MF Tray Set.] and change the Paper Size and Media Type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Before selecting [MP Tray], select the multipurpose settings and change the Paper Size and Media Type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
[Auto]: Paper the same size as the original is automatically selected.
[Cassette 1] - [Cassette 3] : Select from cassettes 1 to 3. (Cassettes 2-3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.)
[MP Tray]: Select MP Tray.
[MF Tray Set.]: If you select [MP Tray], select [MF Tray Set.] and set the Paper Size and Media Type.
Paper Size
Standard Size
Value
A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Yougata 4, Yougata 2, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom *1
Description Select from Standard Size and custom sizes.
[Size Entry]
Value
Metric X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Description
Enter the size not included in Standard Size. The input units can be changed in System Menu. Measurement (page 437)
If [Size Entry] is selected, use [ ], [ ], or [Numeric keys] to set the size of "X" (width) and "Y" (length).
285
Using Various Functions > Functions
Media TypeMedia Type
Value
Description
Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted *2, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched *2, Letterhead *2, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 *2
Select the media type. Displayed after setting [Standard Size] and [Size Entry].
*1: For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following: [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430) *2: For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following: [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430) To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following: SpcialPaper Act. (page 434)
NOTE
· You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
[Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
· If paper of the specified paper size is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, the confirmation screen appears. When the setting is , if the detected size of paper is not loaded, a paper confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select the [OK] key. Copying begins.
286
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Orig.
,
,
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. This function cannot be used if platen is used.
Copying
Value [Off] [Same Width]
[Different Width]
Description
--
Scans and copies multiple sheets of the same width using the document processor.
Scans and copies multiple sheets of different width using the document processor.
Sending/Storing
Value [Off] [Same Width]
[Different Width]
Description
--
Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of the same width using the document processor.
Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of different width using the document processor.
Supported Combinations of Originals
[Same Width] When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows. · A4 and Folio (Legal and Letter)
Example: Folio and A4
[Different Width] The supported combinations of originals are as follows. · Letter, A4, Folio, Legal
Example: A4, Legal
287
Using Various Functions > Functions IMPORTANT
When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
Copy Size
Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals. NOTE
This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
288
Using Various Functions > Functions
Orig.Orientation
,
,
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
· 2-Sided
· Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan
· Combine
· 2-Sided (2-Sided originals)
Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left] or [Auto].
[Top Edge on Top]
[Top Edge on Left]
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed. [Function Default] (page 442)
289
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate
, Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of copies as required according to page number. (Values [Off]/[On])
290
Using Various Functions > Functions
ID Card Copy
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet. (Values [Off]/[On])
291
Using Various Functions > Functions
Density
,
,
Make the overall density darker or lighter.
Select [-4] to [4] (lighter to darker) to set the darkness.
292
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image
,
,
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image Quality (Copy)
[Text+Photo]
Highlighter Value
[Off], [On(Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
NOTE If gray text is not printed completely using [Text+Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
[Photo]
Best for photos taken with a camera.
[Text]
Highlighter
Value [Off], [On(Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Graphic/Map]
Highlighter Value
[Off], [On(Normal)], [On(Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
293
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image (When sending/printing/saving)
[Text+Photo]
Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Highlighter
Value [Off], [On(Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Photo]
Best for photos taken with a camera.
[Text]
Highlighter
Value [Off], [On(Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Light Text/Line]
Highlighter Value
[Off], , [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
294
Using Various Functions > Functions
EcoPrint
, EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required. Value: [Off], [On]
295
Using Various Functions > Functions
Color Selection
, Select the color setting.
Sending/Storing
Item [Auto (Color/Gray)]
[Auto (Color/B & W)]
[Full Color] [Grayscale] [Black & White]
Description
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.
Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.
Scans the document in full color.
Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
Scans the document in black and white.
296
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
,
,
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness
toward "Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire *1 patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness
toward "Blur".
Value
Description
[1] to [3(Vivid)] [-1] to [-3(Grayish)]
Emphasizes the image outline. Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire *1 effect.
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
297
Using Various Functions > Functions
Backgrnd Density
,
,
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.
If the background color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If selecting does not remove the background color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of the background color.
[Off] [Auto] [Manual]
Item
Description
Does not adjust the ground color. Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original. Select [1 (Lighter)] to [5 (Darker)] to adjust the background density manually.
298
Using Various Functions > Functions
Saturation
, Adjust the color saturation of the image.
NOTE
This feature is used when full color or auto color are selected in [Color Selection]. Saturation is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals.
Item [-1] to [-3] (lighter) [1] to [3] (darker)
Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.
Description
299
Using Various Functions > Functions
Prevent Bleed-t
,
,
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
(Values [Off]/[On])
300
Using Various Functions > Functions
Contrast
,
,
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
1 to [4] [-1] to [-4]
Item
Description Increases the sharpness of colors. Creates smoother colors.
301
Using Various Functions > Functions
Erase Colors
,
,
Erases colors in the source document.
[Off]/[On]
Value
[Yellow], [Red], [Cyan], [Magenta], [Green], [Blue], [Black]
Description
Select the colors to erase. You can select up to 6 colors. Choose the color and select [Select] > [Detail] to adjust the range for erasing.
[1] to [5]
Value
Description
The larger the number, the wider the range of colors you want to erase. For example, if you specify [Yellow] and select [5] from the color range, greens and reds close to yellow will be erased.
NOTE If you select only [Black], you cannot set the color range.
302
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
,
,
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Zoom (When copying)
The following zoom options are available.
[Auto]
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
Select from main Standard Zoom and perform Zoom.
[400%] [200%] [141%] [115%] [100] [86%] [70%] [50%] [25%]
A5 A4 B5 A4 A4 B5 A4 A5 -
Others
Reduce/enlarge using a magnification other than Standard Zoom. *1
[129%] [90%] [78%] [64%]
STMT LTR LTR FOL A4 LGL LTR LTR STMT
*1: LTR = Letter, LGL = Legal, STMT = Statement, FOL = Folio
303
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.[ ] , [ ], or the numeric keys can be used to set the value.
304
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom (When printing/sending/storing)
[100%] [Auto]
Item
Description Reproduces the original size. Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size. Paper Selection (page 285) Sending SizeSending Size (page 323) Storing Size (page 340)
305
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages. The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Solid Line Dotted Line Positioning Mark
[Off]
[2 in 1] If you select [Detail], you can perform the following settings. If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442)
2 in 1 Layout
Value [L to R][T to B] [R to L][T to B]
Description Select the page layout of scanned originals and select the [OK] key.
Value
[None], [Solid Line], [Dotted Line], [Positioning Mark]
Description Set the boundary line type and select the [OK] key.
Orig.Orientation
Value
Description
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] and select the [OK] key.
[4 in 1]
If you select [Detail], you can perform the following settings.
If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following:
306
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Function Default] (page 442)
4 in 1 Layout
Value
[Right then Down], [Down then Right], [Left then Down], [Down then Left]
Description Select the page layout of scanned originals and select the [OK] key.
Value
[None], [Solid Line], [Dotted Line], [Positioning Mark]
Description Set the boundary line type and select the [OK] key.
[Orig.Orientation]
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] and select the [OK] key.
Layout image (2 in 1)
[L to R][T to B]
[R to L][T to B]
Layout image (4 in 1)
[Right then Down]
[Left then Down]
307
Using Various Functions > Functions [Down then Right] [Down then Left] NOTE
· The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II, and 16K.
· When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
308
Using Various Functions > Functions
Border Erase
,
,
Erases the black borders that form around the image. The border can be erased as follows:
Standard
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width is fixed.
Full Scan
Scan originals without white margins. No border erase.
Sheet
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width can be adjusted.
309
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Border]
Value
Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Description
Set the border erase width.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys. You can set the border erase width for the back side of double-sided originals by setting the border erase width of [Border] and selecting the [OK] key.
Value [Same as Front], [Do Not Erase]
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Same as Front] or [Do Not Erase].
Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.
[Border]
Value Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
[Gutter]
Value Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Description Set the border erase width of Border and select the [OK] key.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys.
Description Set the border erase width of Gutter and select the [OK] key.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys. You can set the border erase width for the back side of double-sided originals by setting the border erase width of [Border] and [Gutter]and selecting the [OK] key.
Value [Same as Front], [Do Not Erase]
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Same as Front] or [Do Not Erase].
310
Using Various Functions > Functions
Individual
You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
[Top]/[Bottom]/[Left]/[Right]
Value
Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Description
Set the border erase widths separately for top, bottom, left, and right, and select the [OK] key.*1
Set the value by using [+] or [-].
Entry can also be made using the numeric keys.
You can set the border erase width for the back side of double-sided originals by setting the border erase width of [Right] and selecting the [OK] key.
Value [Same as Front], [Do Not Erase]
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Same as Front] or [Do Not Erase]
NOTE
· [Full Scan] is not displayed when copying. · The default setting for border erase width and back side can be changed. For details, refer to the
following: Border Erase def (page 445)
*1: The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following. Measurement (page 437)
311
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
, Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals. The following modes are available.
1-sided>>2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available. 1 Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. 2 Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees. Copies can be bound on the top edge,
facing the same orientation when turning the pages.
2-sided>>1-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. Place originals in the document processor. Available only on models supported by duplex scanning function. The following binding options are available. · Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. · Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
312
Using Various Functions > Functions
2-sided>>2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Place originals in the document processor. Available only on models supported by duplex scanning function.
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A4, A5-R, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO B5
Duplex (When copying)
Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided originals to 1-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished documents.
[1-sided>>1-sided]
Disables the function.
[1-sided>>2-sided]
If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442) If you select [Detail], you can perform the [Finish. Binding] and [Orig.Orientation] settings.
Finish. Binding
Value [Left/Right], [Top]
Description Select the binding orientation and select the [OK] key.
Orig.Orientation
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top,] or [Top Edge on Left] and select the [OK] key.
[2-sided>>1-sided]
(Only on models with a duplex scanning function) If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following:
[Function Default] (page 442)
If you select [Detail], you can perform the [Orig. Binding] and [Orig.Orientation] settings.
313
Using Various Functions > Functions
Orig. Binding
Fixed value [Left/Right], [Top]
Orig.Orientation
Value [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description Select the binding direction of originals and select the [OK] key.
Description Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] and select the [OK] key.
[2-sided>>2-sided]
(Only on models with a duplex scanning function) If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442) If you select [Detail], you can perform the , [Finish. Binding][Orig. Binding], and [Orig.Orientation] settings.
Orig. Binding
Value [Left/Right], [Top]
Description Select the binding direction of originals and select the [OK] key.
Finish. Binding
Value [Left/Right], [Top]
Description Select the binding orientation and select the [OK] key.
Orig.Orientation
Value
Description
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left] and select the [OK] key.
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key. After scanning all originals, select [End Scan]. Copying begins.
314
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex (USB drive)
Prints the document on both sides. Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
[1-sided]
Disables the function.
[Duplex]
If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442) If you select [Detail], you can perform the [Finish. Binding] and settings. If you select [Description], you can perform the [Finished Binding Direction] settings.
[Left/Right]
Value
[Top]
Description
Prints on both sides so that the correct orientation is achieved when binding the paper on the left or right.
Prints on both sides so that the correct orientation is achieved when binding the paper at the top.
315
Using Various Functions > Functions
Continuous Scan
,
,
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job.
Scanning of originals will continue until [Finish Scan] is selected.
Value: [Off], [OnOn]
316
Using Various Functions > Functions
JobFinish Notice
,
,
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
It can also be set up to send a notice when a job is interrupted.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE
· PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to the following: What is Command Center RX (page 110)
· E-mail can be sent to a single destination. · It is possible to download the scan data to PC from the URL provided in the Job Finish Notice E-mail in the
event of "Send to Folder (SMB/FTP)". This is a useful function in case if it is not possible to send/receive a large amount of scan data due to the restriction of the mail attachment file size.
Item
Description
[Off] [JobFinished Only] [Fin.+Interrupted]
-- Sends E-mail notice only when a job is complete. Notifies you when a job ends and when a job is interrupted.
If you select [JobFinished Only] or [Fin.+Interrupted], you can select [Address Book] or [Address Entry] as the destination specification method.
Item
Description
317
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Name Entry
, Name a document. Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here. Enter the file name (up to 32 characters) and select the [OK] key. To add a date and time, select [Date] and then select the [OK] key. To add a job number, select [Job No.] and then select the [OK] key. To add both, select [Job No. + Date] or [Date + Job No.] and then select the [OK] key.
318
Using Various Functions > Functions
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
NOTE · This function is not available if current job was an override. · Priority printing may not be possible depending on the status of the job being printed and memory usage.
319
Using Various Functions > Functions
FoldingDetection
,
,
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected.
NOTE
Available only on models supported by this function. Since 35 ppm models (ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x) support only Simplex Scanning, this function is not supported. Only applicable when 2-sided reading Document Processor (DSDP) is supported.
[Off] [On]
Value
Description
It does not detect. If a bent corner is detected, a message is displayed to stop reading the original.
320
Using Various Functions > Functions
Skip Blank Page
,
,
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank.
Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the document.
Selecting [On] > [Detail] displays the screen.
Select from [Blank+Ruled Line], [Blank Pages Only] or [Blank+Some Text].
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
321
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Duplex2-Sided (2-Sided originals)
, Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. The function is only displayed on models that have a duplex funtion.
[1-sided]
There is no setting for the binding or the original orientation.
[2-sided]
If you select the [OK] key, it will be copied with the default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442) If you select [Detail], you can perform the [Orig. Binding] and [Orig.Orientation] settings.
[Orig. Binding]
Value [Left/Right], [Top]
Description Set the binding direction of originals and select the [OK] key.
[Orig.Orientation]
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Specify the orientation of the original document top edge and select the [OK] key to scan the correct direction.
Sample image
[Duplex] > [Left/Right]
[Duplex] > [Top]
322
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending SizeSending Size
Select size of image to be sent. Select from [Same as Orig. Size] or the list below. [Same as Orig. Size]
Automatically sends the same size as the original.
Value
Description
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, postcard, return postcard, Yogai No. 4, Yogai No. 2, Nagata No. 3, Nagata No. 4, Yocho No. 3
Choose from standard sizes and special standard sizes.
Regarding the relationship among Original Size, Sending SizeSending Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below. · Original Size and sending size are the same
Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 284)
Sending SizeSending Size Select [Same as Orig. Size].
Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Zoom (page 303)
· Original Size and sending size are different
Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 284)
Sending SizeSending Size Select the desired size.
Zoom Select [Auto]. Zoom (page 303)
323
Using Various Functions > Functions NOTE
When you specify the Sending SizeSending Size that is different from Original Size and select [100%] as Zoom, you can send the image as the actual size (no zoom).
324
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Format
, Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp.PDF]. When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality. If you selected [PDF] or [ High Comp.PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings. Select the [OK] key to save or send in PDF format. Image quality and PDF/A settings will be set to default values.
NOTE
The image quality, PDF/A, etc. of each file are as the settings made in the function default settings. For the default settings, refer to the following: [Function Default] (page 442)
[PDF]
[Image Quality]
Value
1 Low(High Comp) to 5 High(Low Comp)
[Encryption]
Description
Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
[Off], [On]
Value
[PDF/A]
Description
Set the encrypted PDF and select the [OK] key. If you select [On], refer to the following. PDF Encryption Functions (page 327)
Value
Description
[Off], [PDF/A-1a], [PDF/A-1b], [PDF/ Select the PDF/A-1 format and select the [OK] key. A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], [PDF/A-2u]
[ DigitalSignature]
325
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Off][On]
Value
[TIFF]
[Image Quality]
Value to
[XPS]
[Image Quality]
Value to
[OpenXPS]
[Image Quality]
Value to
[JPEG]
[Image Quality]
1 to 5
Value
[High Comp.PDF]
[Image Quality]
Value [Comp. Priority], [Normal], [Quality Priority] [Encryption]
Description Selecting [On] enables you to set digital signature to file. PDF Electronic Signature (page 330)
Description Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
Description Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
Description Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
Description Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
Description Selecting [Detail] displays the [Image Quality] screen. Select the image quality, and select the [OK] key.
326
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Off], [On]
Value
[PDF/A]
Description
Set the encrypted PDF and select the [OK] key. If you select [On], refer to the following. PDF Encryption Functions (page 327)
Value
Description
[Off], [PDF/A-1a], [PDF/A-1b], [PDF/ Select the PDF/A-1 format and select the key. A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], [PDF/A-2u]
[DigitalSignature]
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Select [PDF] or [High Comp.PDF], [Encryption] > select [On].
Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in Compatibility.
If Acrobat3.0&Later is selected
[Open Document]
Value [Off], [Permit ]
Description
Enter the password to open the PDF file. Select On, and enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation.
[Edit/Print Doc.]
Value [Off], [Permit ]
Printing Allowed Value
[Off], [Permit ] Changes Allowed
Value [Not Allowed] [Commenting]
Description Enter the password to edit the PDF file. Select On, and enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation. When you have entered the password to edit document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Description Disables the printing of PDF file.
Description Disables the change to the PDF file. Can only add commenting.
327
Using Various Functions > Functions
Value [Page Layout] [Any Changes]
Copying Contents
Value [Disable], [Enable]
Description Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file. Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file.
Description Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
328
Using Various Functions > Functions
If Acrobat5.0&Later is selected [Open Document]
Value [Off], [OnOn]
Description
Enter the password to open the PDF file. Select On, and enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation.
[Edit/Print Doc.]
Value [Off], [OnOn]
Printing Allowed Value
[Not Allowed] [Allowed(LowRes.)] [Permit ] Changes Allowed
Value [Not Allowed] [Ins./Del./Rotat.] [Commenting] [Any Changes] Copying Contents
Value [Disable], [Enable]
Description Enter the password to edit the PDF file. Select On, and enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation. When you have entered the password to edit document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Description Disables the printing of PDF file. Can print the PDF file only in low resolution. Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Description Disables the change to the PDF file. Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF file. Can only add commenting. Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file.
Description Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
329
Using Various Functions > Functions
PDF Electronic Signature
If [PDF] or [High Comp.PDF] is selected as a file format, electronic signature can be added to the PDF to be sent. Electronic signature can certify a sender of document and prevent falsification. To use this function, it is required to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer and enable digital signature to files from the system menu. In this manual, a procedure to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX is described as an example.
NOTE
· This function can be configured when [Off], [PDF/A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], [PDF/A-2u] is selected in PDF/A. · To register a signing certificate from KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following.
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
1 Access to Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
2 Register the signature certificate used in the digital signature addition setting
1 From the [Functions] menu, click [Common/Job Defaults]. 2 Click [File Default Settings] in [Signing Certificate] > [Settings] to create or import the device certificate.
Command Center RX User Guide 3 Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart entire device] to restart the device.
3 Configure the digital signature settings.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Send] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [DigitalSignature] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Configure the digital signature addition settings. Configurable items are as follows: [DigitalSignature] Select whether to add a digital signature. [Off] Does not add a digital signature. [Specify Each Job] Whether to add a digital signature is selected each time of sending. [On] Always adds a digital signature when sending.
330
Using Various Functions > Functions [Format] Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature. Value: [SHA-1], [SHA-256], [SHA-384], [SHA-512]
NOTE This function is displayed when Digital Signature is set to [Specify Each Job] or [On].
[Password Confirm] Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature. Value: [Off], [On]
[Password] Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
NOTE [Password] is displayed when you select [Specify Each Job] from Digital Signature and [On] is selected in [Password Confirm] displayed after restart.
3 Select [OK].
4 [Send] key > [Function Menu] key > [ ][ ] key > [File Format] > [OK] key 5 Configure the settings
1 Select [PDF] or [High Comp.PDF] as a file format. 2 From "Digital Signature", select [On] > [OK] key in order.
NOTE This function is displayed when [Specify Each Job] is set in Step 3-2. When [On] is selected for , the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter a password set in the system menu. Password Policy Settings (page 483)
6 Press the [Start] key.
331
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Separation
, Creates multiple files for each scanned original data page. (Value: [Off]/[Each Page]) When you select [Each Page], file separation is set.
NOTE A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
332
Using Various Functions > Functions
Scan Resolution
, Select fineness of scanning resolution. (Value: [600x600dpi]/[400x400dpi U.Fin]/[300x300dpi]/[200x400dpi S.Fin]/[200x200dpi Fine]/[200x100dpi Normal])
NOTE The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times.
333
Using Various Functions > Functions
Clarify Text (Noise Removal)
, When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Value: [Off], [On]
334
Using Various Functions > Functions
Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document. Select "Subject Entry"/"Body Entry" to enter the Email subject/body.
NOTE The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
335
Using Various Functions > Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP. Encryption secures the document transmission. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE In Command Center RX, click [Security Settings] [Network Security] in order. Be sure that "TLS" of Secure Protocol Settings is [On] and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings. Command Center RX User Guide
336
Using Various Functions > Functions
EmailEncryptedTX
Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate. Encryption secures the document transmission. (Values [Off]/[On])
NOTE To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX. Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX (page 338)
337
Using Various Functions > Functions
DigitalSignature
Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate. By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the destination and detect tampering during transmission. (Values [Off]/[On])
NOTE
To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in Command Center RX. Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX (page 338)
Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX
When using the Email Encrypted TX and Digital Signature to Email functions, make the following settings in Command Center RX.
1 Access to Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
2 Register the device certificate which is used for S/MIME.
1 From the [Security Settings] menu, click [Certificates].
2 Click "Device Certificate" of [Settings] (1 to 5) to create or import the device certificate. Command Center RX User Guide
3 Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart entire device] to restart the device.
3 Configure the protocol settings
1 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocols].
2 Set "Send Protocol" and [SMTP (E-mail TX)] of [S/MIME] to [On].
3 Click [Submit].
4 Configure the E-mail function.
1 From the [Functions] menu, click [E-mail].
2 Configure the settings in "S/MIME Settings" as necessary. Command Center RX User Guide
3 Click [Submit].
338
Using Various Functions > Functions
5 Link the E-mail address with S/MIME certificates
1 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book]. 2 Click the contact's [Number] or [Name] you want to edit. 3 Click "S/MIME Certificate" in [Settings]. 4 Click [Import] on the required certificate to register it, and then click [Submit]. 5 Click [OK].
339
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored.
Value
Description
Same as original size, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Yougata 4, Yougata 2, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3
If you want to use a size different from the original size, select from the standard sizes.
Regarding the relationship among Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related. For details, see the table below. · Original Size and the size you wish to store as are the same
Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 284)
Storing Size Select [Same as Orig. Size].
Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Zoom (page 303)
· Original Size and the size you wish to store as are different Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 284)
Storing Size Select the desired size.
Zoom Select [Auto]. Zoom (page 303)
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
340
Using Various Functions > Functions
Encrypted PDF
Enter the password you set to print the PDF data. Enter the password and select [OK].
NOTE For details on entering the password, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
341
Using Various Functions > Functions
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item [Paper Size] [Image Resolution] [Print Resolution]
Description Fits the image size to the selected paper size. Prints at resolution of the actual image. Fits the image size to the print resolution.
342
Using Various Functions > Functions
XPS FitTo Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. (Values: [Off], [On])
343
Status/Job Cancel
7 Status/Job Cancel
Checking Job Status.................................................................................................................345 Checking Job History ...............................................................................................................353 Job Operation ...........................................................................................................................359 Check the device information ................................................................................................361 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper, and the Condition of the Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 362
344
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Screens Print Job Status
Send Job Status
Store Job Status Scheduled Job
Job status to be displayed
· Copy · Printer · Fax reception · Email reception · Printing data from USB Drive · Application · Printing Report/List · Email · Sending Job Folder · Fax transmission · Sending Job - Fax Server · Sending Job Application · Multiple destination · Scan · Fax · Printer Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Displaying Status Screens
1 Display the screen [Status/Job Cancel] key > [Delete][ ][ ] keys > [Print Job Status] > [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or > [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key
345
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
2 Select the job you want to check.
1 Select the job to confirm, and select [Menu]. 2 [ ][ ] keys > [Detail] > [OK] key 3 The status of the jobs is displayed.
Print Job Status (page 347) Send Job Status (page 349) Store Job Status (page 351) Scheduled Job Status (page 352)
NOTE · If you select a fax job on the [Send Job Status] screen, [PriorityOverride] will be displayed.
Select [PriorityOverride] and select the [OK] key to pause the current job and give priority to the selected job. · In [Scheduled Job], [Start Now] is displayed. Select [Start Now] and select the [OK] key to submit the selected job immediately.
3 Check the information. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. Select the [OK] key. Print Job Status (page 347) Send Job Status (page 349) Store Job Status (page 351) Scheduled Job Status (page 352)
346
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
NOTE · You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
[Disp. Status/Log] (page 452) · This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX. For details, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
Print Job Status
Status
Item
Accepted Time Job Name
Job Type
User Name Page and Copy Original Pages
Description
Status of job [Processing]: The status before starting to print [Pause]: Pausing print job or error [Canceling]: Canceling the job [-----]: The job has finished.
Accepted time of job
When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting Detail will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
[Copy]: Print copy [FAX] Fax reception and print [Box]: Printing from a document box [Printer]: Printer job [Report]: Printing report/list [E-mail]: Email reception and print [USB]: Printing data from USB drive
User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled.
· Number of printed pages · Number of printed pages/Total number of printed pages
Original pages
347
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Item Sender Info.
Description
Displays information about the sender.
For fax reception If a sender name is set when receiving a fax, the sender name will be displayed. If only the sender number is set, only the number will be displayed. If there is no sender information, or if fax has not been received, [-----]---- is displayed.
For email The email address appears. Otherwise, [---- -] is displayed.
NOTE
When the sender information is too long to be displayed, selecting [Detail] will display the entire sender information. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
348
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Job Status
Status
Item
Accepted Time Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages Color/B & W
Description
Job status [Processing]: The status before starting to send, such as during scanning originals [Pause]: Pausing the job [Canceling]: Canceling the job
Accepted time of job
When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting [Detail] will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
[FAX]: Fax transmission [E-mail]: Email transmission [Folder] Sending job folder [Application]: Application transmission [Multi]: Multiple destination [FAX Server]: Fax server transmittion
User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled.
Original pages
Color mode [Color/B & W] [Full Color] [Black & White] [Grayscale] [Mixed] [Auto (Color/Gray)] [Auto (Color/B & W)]
349
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Item Destination
Description
Destination is displayed. When there is only one destination Destination (any of destination name, FAX number, email address, or server name)
NOTE
When the sender information is too long to be displayed, selecting [Detail] will display the entire sender information. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
When there are multiple destinations [Broadcast] is displayed. Selecting [List] will display all destinations. Selecting the [Exit] key will return to the original screen.
NOTE
If the sender information is too long to be displayed, select the destination and select the [OK] key to return to the previous screen.
350
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Job Status
Item Accepted Time Job Type Job Name User Name Status
Original Pages Color/B & W
Sender Info.
Description
Accepted Time of job
[Scan]: Save scan [FAX]: Save fax [Printer]: Save printer
When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting Detail will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
[-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled.
Status of job [Processing]: The status before starting to save, such as during scanning originals [Canceling]: Canceling the job
Original pages
Color mode [Color/B & W] [Full Color] [Black & White] [Grayscale] [Mixed] [Auto (Color/Gray)] [Auto (Color/B & W)]
Displays information about the sender. For fax reception If a sender name is set when receiving a fax, the sender name will be displayed. If only the sender number is set, only the number will be displayed. If there is no sender information, or if fax has not been received, [-----]---- is displayed.
NOTE
When the sender information is too long to be displayed, selecting [Detail] will display the entire sender information. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
351
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Scheduled Job Status
Status
Item
DestinationAccepted Time
User Name
[Start Time] Original Pages Color/B & W
Job Name
Job Type
Description
Job status [Waiting]: Waiting sending
Destination is displayed. Send Job Status (page 349)
User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled.
Time to start the scheduled job
Original pages
Color mode [Black & White]
When the sender information is too long to be displayed, selecting [Detail] will display the entire sender information. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen.
[FAX] is displayed.
352
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
NOTE
· Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
· You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log. [Disp. Status/Log] (page 452)
· This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job histories are available.
Screen Print job
SSend job
Store job Fax job
Job histories to be displayed
· Copy · Printer · Fax reception · Email reception · Printing data from USB Drive · Application · Printing Report/List · Email · Sending Job Folder · Fax transmission · Sending Job - Fax Server · Sending Job Application · Multiple destination · Scan · Fax · Printer FAX Operation Guide
353
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Displaying Job History Screen
1 Display the screen
1 [Status/Job Cancel] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Print Job Log] > [Send Job Log], [Store Job Log] or [FAX Job Log] > [OK] key
FAX Operation Guide
2 Select the job you want to check.
1 Select the job to confirm, and select [Detail]. An icon showing the result of the job is displayed to the right of each job. : The job finished normally.
: Job error
: Job cancelled
NOTE
You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log. [Disp. Status/Log] (page 452) This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
3 Checking Job History
1 Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. Print Job History Results Job results [OK]: The Job is completed. [Error]: Error has occurred. [Cancel]: The job has been canceled. Accepted time Accepted time of job End time Job end time Job Name When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting [Detail] will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen. Job Type [Copy]: Print copy [FAX] Fax reception and print
354
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
[Box]: Printer job [Printer]: Print copy [Report]: Printing report/list [E-mail]: Email reception and print [USB]: Data printing from external media User Name User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled. Pages and number of copies Number of printed pages Number of printed pages/Total number of printed pages Original pages Original pages Sender Information Displays information about the sender. Send Job Status (page 349) Send Job Log Results Job results [OK]: The Job is completed. [Error]: Error has occurred. [Cancel]: The job has been canceled. Accepted time Accepted time of job End time Job end time Job Name When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting [Detail] will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen. Job Type [E-mail]: Email transmission [Folder]: PC (SMB/FTP) transmission [FAX]: Fax transmission [Application]: Application transmission [Multi]: Multi transmission [FAX Server]: Fax server transmittion User Name User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled.
355
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Original pages Original pages
Color/Black & White Color mode [Color/B & W] [Full Color] [Black & White] [Grayscale] [Mixed]
Destination Destination is displayed. Send Job Status (page 349)
NOTE
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in.
Store Job Log Results
Job results [OK]: The Job is completed. [Error]: Error has occurred. [Cancel]: The job has been canceled. Accepted time Accepted time of job End time Job end time Job Name When the job name cannot be displayed because the job name is too long, selecting [Detail] will display the entire job name. Selecting the [OK] key will return to the original screen. Job Type [FAX]: Save fax [Scan]: Save scan [Printer]: Save printer User Name User Name for the executed job [-----] is displayed when user login administration is disabled. Original pages Original pages
356
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History Color/Black & White Color mode [Color/B & W] [Full Color] [Black & White] [Grayscale] [Mixed] Sender Information Displays information about the sender. Send Job Status (page 349)
357
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
358
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Pause]. Printing is paused. When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume]. NOTE Selecting a function key such as the [Back] key or the [Copy] key while the job is paused will [Resume paused jobs. Are you sure? ] is displayed. Select [Yes] and select the [OK] key to restart the job and display the following screen. If you select [No] and select the [OK] key, the job remains paused and the following screen appears.
359
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
1 Display the screen [Status/Job Cancel] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Print Job Status] > [Send Job Status] > [Store Job Status] or > [Scheduled Job] > [OK] key
2 Cancel a job. For a print job 1 Select the job to cancel, and select the [Menu] key. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Cancel Job] > [OK] key > [Yes][Yes] NOTE If you select a fax-in job, [Cannot cancel FAX reception jobs.] is displayed, and the job cannot be canceled. For send job status, save job status, or reserve job 1 Select the job to cancel, and select the [Cancel] key. NOTE To cancel the job, select [Menu], [Cancel], and then the [OK] key. 2 Select [Yes].
360
Status/Job Cancel > Check the device information
Check the device information
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the item to check. Select the [OK] key to display the status of the selected device.
2 Check the information. Select the item to check. Select the [OK] key to display the status of the selected device. [Rmt. Op. Status] You can check the situation of remote operation. To end remote operation, select [Disconnect]. [Scanner] Statuses such as document scanning status and standby status are displayed. [Printer] Status such as waiting and printing are displayed. [FAX] Information such as sending/receiving or dialing is displayed. Select [Line Off] cancel the fax being sent/received.
NOTE
Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
[Unit Condition] You can check the remaining life of the drum unit and the cassette.
[USB] The usage/total capacity/free space of the USB drive connected to this machine is displayed. Select [Remove] to safely remove the USB drive.
[USB Keyboard] Displays the status of the USB keyboard.
[Network] Displays the state of the network connection.
[Wi-Fi] You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the connection status, IP address, and the network name (SSID address) of the machine.
[Wi-Fi Direct] Displays the Wi-Fi direct connection status and the network name (SSID) of the machine.
[Security] You can check the security information on the machine.
361
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper, and the Condition of the Unit
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper, and the Condition of the Unit
On the message display, you can check the presence of toner and paper, as well as the remaining life of the unit.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Check the information. [ ][ ] keys > [Toner Status] or [Paper Status] > [OK] key
The items you can check are described below.
[Toner Status] The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels.
[Paper Status] Displays the status of the paper source. Select the [ the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
] key to display the next paper source. Select
[Unit Condition] Displays the time remaining on the Developer Unit, the Document Processor, and the Cassette. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
362
System Menu
8 System Menu
Operation Method...................................................................................................................364 System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................365 [Report].....................................................................................................................................367 [Counter]................................................................................................................................... 372 [System/Network].................................................................................................................... 373 [User/Job Account] ..................................................................................................................420 [User Property] ........................................................................................................................422 [Common Settings] .................................................................................................................423 [Copy] ........................................................................................................................................463 [Printer] ..................................................................................................................................... 464 [Send] ........................................................................................................................................467 [FAX] ..........................................................................................................................................470 [Document Box].......................................................................................................................471 [Application] .............................................................................................................................472 [Edit Destination] .....................................................................................................................473 [Adjust/Maint.] .........................................................................................................................475
363
System Menu > Operation Method
Operation Method
Configure settings related to overall machine operation. System Menu is operated as follows:
1 Display the screen Selecting the [System Menu/Counter] key will display the setting screen in the message display. Select the displayed setting. Using the Operation Panel (page 54) Refer to the following system items and configure the necessary settings.
1 Displays the System Menu items. 2 Select the displayed item or change the value. 3 Confirm the selected settings. 4 Cancels the current settings and returns to the next level up.
NOTE · When setting functions that require administrator privileges, you must log in with administrator
privileges. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. · If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function
screen to immediately change the settings.
364
System Menu > System Menu Settings
System Menu Settings
This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
[ Report]
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. [Report] (page 367)
[Counter]
Check the number of pages printed. [Counter] (page 372)
[System/Network]
Explains about this machine's system. [Network Setting] (page 373)
[User/Job Account]
Configures settings related to machine management. [User/Job Account] (page 420)
[Common Settings]
Configure each setting. [Common Settings] (page 423)
[Copy]
Configures settings for copying functions. [Copy] (page 463)
[Printer]
Change the printer's initial settings to suit your environment. [Printer] (page 464)
[Send]
Configures settings for sending functions. [Send] (page 467)
[FAX]
Configures settings for fax functions. [FAX] (page 470)
365
System Menu > System Menu Settings
[Document Box]
Configure settings for F Code Box, Job Box and Polling Box. [Document Box] (page 471)
[Application]
Configure the application settings. [Application] (page 472)
[Edit Destination]
Configure settings for address book. [Edit Destination] (page 473)
[Adjust/Maint.]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. [Adjust/Maint.] (page 475)
366
System Menu > [Report]
[Report]
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
[Report Print]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Report Print] > [OK] key
Item [Menu Map] [Config. List] [Status Page]
Description
Prints the Menu Map. The machine's settings can be checked. Print the system settings as the list. Prints the status page. You can check information such as the current settings, available memory, and installed optional equipment.
[Service Status] [Account. Report] [Font List]
Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
If job accounting is enabled, the total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Prints the font list. You can check the fonts installed in this machine with a sample.
[DataSanitization]
Prints the data sanitization report.
367
System Menu > [Report]
[Admin Rpt Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Admin Rpt Set.] > [OK] key This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Configure settings for Outgoing Fax report and Incoming Fax report. FAX Operation Guide
368
System Menu > [Report]
[Result Rpt Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Result Rpt Set.] > [OK] key
Configure settings for notices for sending and receiving.
[Send Result]
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Item [E-mail/Folder]
[FAX] [Attached NW FAX] [CancelBeforeSend]
[Dest. Info.]
Description
Automatically print a report of transmission result when Email or SMB/FTP transmission is complete. Value: [Off], [On], [Error Only]
FAX Operation Guide
FAX Operation Guide
Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent. Value: [Off], [On] (Not displayed when both [E-mail/Folder] and [FAX] are [Off].)
Select the Recipient Format for the send result report. Value: [Dest. or Name] (Not displayed when both [E-mail/Folder] and [FAX] are [Off].)
[FAX RX Result]
Displays only for fax models. FAX Operation Guide
[JobFinish Notice]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: Fax Operation Guide
369
System Menu > [Report]
[Jobs Log]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Report] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Jobs Log] > [OK] key
Item [Auto Sending]
Description
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories to be sent automatically. The setting range is 1 to 16.
[Send History] [Destination]
[Subject] [Personal Info.]
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually. You must have already specified the destination in [Destination].
Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set. Value: [Confirmation], [Register] If you select [Confirmation], you can confirm the destination specified in [Destination]. If you select [Register], you can specify the destination as [Address Book] or [Address Entry].
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail. Value: Up to 60 characters
Select whether to include personal information in the job log. Value: ,
370
System Menu > [Report]
History Management
It is possible to perform Log Management for the following logs on this machine.
Jobs Log
Log subject Copy/Fax/Scan/Send/Print job completion Checking job status/Changing of jobs/Canceling of jobs
Log information Event occurrence date and time Event type Information on users logged in (or users who attempted to log in) NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
371
System Menu > [Counter]
[Counter]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Counter] > [OK] key
Item [Printed Pages]
[Scanned Pages]
Description
You can check the number of pages printed. Value: [by Function], [by Paper Size], [by Duplex], [by Combine] You can check the total number of pages loaded for copy, fax, etc.
372
System Menu > [System/Network]
[System/Network]
[Network Setting]
Configure the machine system.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key Configures network settings.
[Host Name]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [Host Name] > [OK] key
Item [Host Name]
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX. Changing Device Information (page 113)
373
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wi-Fi Easy Setup]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Wi-Fi Easy Setup] > [OK] key Set up Wi-Fi using your computer or mobile device. Select [Yes] and follow the instructions on the screen.
374
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wi-Fi Direct Set]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys >[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [Wi-Fi Direct Set] > [OK] key > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
Set Wi-Fi Direct.
Item [Wi-Fi Direct]
[Device Name]
Description
Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct. Value: [Off], [On] Specify the device name.
NOTE
· Up to 32 characters can be entered. · This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
[IP Address]
Check the IP address of the machine. [TCP/IP Settings] (page 383)
NOTE This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
[Auto Disconnect]
Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· If you select [On], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.
· This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
[Persistent Group]
Set whether Wi-Fi Direct connection as Persistent Group (information for the connection is kept even if the power is turned off).
Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].
375
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Password]
Item
Description
Select whether the Wi-Fi Direct password is automatically generated or created manually. When [Auto] is selected, the Persistent Group setting changes to [On]. When [Auto] is selected, the Persistent Group setting changes to [On]. Value: [Auto], [Manual]
NOTE If [Manual] is selected, set a password (8 or more characters).
[Frequency Band]
Set the frequency band to be used. Value: [2.4GHz], [5GHz]
376
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wi-Fi Settings]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys >[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [OK] key > [Wi-Fi] Set Wi-Fi Direct.
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi]
Item
Description
Select whether to use Wi-Fi. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE If you select [On], restart your network for the setting to take effect.
[Setup]
Item [ConnectionStatus]
Description You can check the status of wireless LAN.
[Quick Setup]
If you want to connect to an access point that supports automatic wireless network configuration, you can configure the connection using a simple setup.
NOTE When connecting to an access point configured for WEP, select [WEP Key Index] and select WEP Key Index.
Item [Available Net.]
Description Select connectable access points, select the [OK] key, and enter the WEP key or the pre-shared key to connect.
NOTE
· Select [Reload] and the computer list will be reloaded. · If the access point security setting is WEP, select [Menu] and set
WEP Key Index in the range of 0 to 3.
377
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [Push Button]
Description
If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE The push button method supports only the WPS.
[PIN (Device)]
Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
[Custom Setup]
The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Item [NetwkName(SSID)]
Description
Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE Up to 32 characters can be entered.
[Netwk Authentic.]
Select network authentication type.
Value: [Open], [WPA2/WPA-PSK], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA2/WPA-EAP], [WPA2EAP], [WPA3SAE/WPA2PSK], [WPA3-SAE], [WPA3/WPA2-EAP], [WPA3-EAP]
378
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [Encryption]
Description
Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication setting. Open Value: [Disabled], [WEP]
NOTE
If you selected [WEP], set the WEP key (up to 26 characters) and WEP Key Index (0 to 3).
WPA2/WPA-PSK Value: [AES], [Auto], [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters) WPA2-PSK Value: [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters) WPA2/WPA-EAP Value: [AES], [Auto] WPA2-EAP Value: ------WPA3-SAE/WPA2-PSK Value: [Preshared Key] WPA3-SAE Value: [Preshared Key] WPA3/WPA2-EAP Value: ------WPA3-EAP Value: -------
[Auto CH Control]
Item [Auto CH Control]
Description
Select [On] to use the best channel by checking the radio wave conditions around you. Value: [Off], [On]
[TCP/IP Settings]
[TCP/IP]
Item
Description
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol. Value: [Off], [On]
[IPv4 Setting]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. Displayed when TCP/IP is set to [On].
379
System Menu > [System/Network]
[DHCP]
Item
[Auto-IP]
[IP Address]
Description
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server. Value: [Off], [On] Select whether to use Auto-IP. Value: [Off], [On] Set the IP address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
[Subnet Mask]
Set the IP subnet mask. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
[Default Gateway]
Set the Default gateway. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
[DNS Server]
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Auto (DHCP)], [Manual]
NOTE
When [Manual] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into [DNS Server] and [DNS Server].
[DNS over TLS]
Set whether to connect to a SNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off], [On], [Auto]
IMPORTANT
· When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
380
System Menu > [System/Network]
[IPv6 Setting]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. Displayed when TCP/IP is set to [On].
Item [IPv6 Setting]
Select whether to use IPv6. Value: [Off], [On]
Description
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP Address in [Link Local] after restarting the network.
[Manual Settings]
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
[IP Address]
128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
[Prefix Length]
0 to 128
[Default Gateway]
128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [Off]. · To enter [Default Gateway], set [RA(Stateless)] to [Off].
[RA(Stateless)]
Select whether to use RA (Stateless). Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On]. · Selecting [On] displays [IP Address 1] - [IP Address 5] to after
restarting the network.
381
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [DHCPv6 Settings]
Description
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On]. · Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address] after restarting
the network.
[DNS Server]
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Auto (DHCP)], [Manual]
NOTE
When [Manual] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into [DNS Server] and [DNS Server].
[DNS over TLS]
Set whether to connect to a SNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off], [On], [Auto]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[Restart Network]
Item [Restart Network]
Restarts the network.
Description
382
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wired Netwk. Set]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [OK] key Configure wired network settings.
[TCP/IP Settings]
[TCP/IP]
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol. Value: [Off], [On]
[IPv4 Setting]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].
[DHCP]
Item
[Auto-IP]
[IP Address]
Description
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server. Value: [Off], [On] Select whether to use Auto-IP. Value: [Off], [On] Set the IP address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
[Subnet Mask]
Set the IP subnet mask. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
[Default Gateway]
Set the IP gateway address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to [On], the value cannot be entered.
383
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [DNS Server]
Description
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Auto (DHCP)], [Manual]
NOTE
When [Manual] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into [Primary Server] and [Secondary Server].
[DNS over TLS]
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off], [On], [Auto]
IMPORTANT
· When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[IPv6 Setting]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].
Item [IPv6 SettingIPv6 Setting]
Select whether to use IPv6. Value: [Off], [On]
Description
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [Link LocalLink Local] after restarting the network.
384
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [Manual Settings]
Description
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). Value
[IP AddressIP Address] 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
[Prefix Length] 0 to 128
[Default Gateway] 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On]. · To enter [Default GatewayDefault Gateway], set [RA(Stateless)] to
[Off].
[RA (Stateless)]
Select whether to use RA (Stateless). Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6 Setting] is set to [On]. · Selecting [On] displays [IP Address 1] - [IP Address 5] to after
restarting the network.
[DHCPv6 Settings]
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On]. · Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address] after restarting
the network.
385
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item [DNS Server]
Description
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Auto (DHCP)], [Manual]
NOTE
When [Manual] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into [Primary Server] and [Secondary Server].
[DNS over TLS]
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off] , [On] , [Auto]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
386
System Menu > [System/Network]
[LAN Interface]
Item [LAN Interface]
Description
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. Value: [Auto], [10Base-Half], [10Base-Full], [100Base-Half], [100BaseFull], [1000Base-T]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
387
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Bonjour]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Bonjour] > [OK] key
[Bonjour]
Item
Description
Select whether to use [Bonjour]. Value: [Off], [On]
388
System Menu > [System/Network]
[IP Filter (IPv4)]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [IP Filter (IPv4)] > [OK] key
Item [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Description
Configure the IP Filter Setting. IP filter is a function used to restrict the access to the machine by setting the IP address and protocol. The IP address or network address of permitted hosts is set from Command Center RX. Not setting the IP Filter will allow access from all hosts. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn] Command Center RX User Guide
389
System Menu > [System/Network]
IP Filter (IPv6)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [IP Filter (IPv6)] > [OK] key
Item [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Description
Configure the IP Filter Setting. IP filter is a function used to restrict the access to the machine by setting the IP address and protocol. The IP address or network address of permitted hosts is set from Command Center RX. Not setting the IP Filter will allow access from all hosts. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn] Command Center RX User Guide
390
System Menu > [System/Network]
[IPSec]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [IPSec] > [OK] key
[IPSec]
Item
Description
Set whether or not to use the IPSec. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
391
System Menu > [System/Network]
[ProtocolSettings]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ProtocolSettings] > [OK] key Configures protocol settings.
[SNMPv3]
[SNMPv3]
Item
Description
Set whether to communicate using SNMPv3. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[FTP(Server)]
Item [FTP(Server)]
Description
Set whether to send documents using FTP. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[FTP(Client)]
Item [FTP(Server)]
Description
Set whether to send documents using FTP. If the setting is [On], you can specify the port number used by FTP. Typically, use 21. Value: [Off], [On] (Port Number: 1 to 65535
[SMB(Server)]
Item [SMB(Server)]
[SMBv1]
Description
Set whether to send documents using SMB. If the setting is [On], you can specify the port number used by SMB. Typically, use 445. Value: [Off], [On] (Port Number: 1 to 65535
Set whether to send documents using SMBv1. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE This setting is available when [SMB(Server)] is [On].
392
System Menu > [System/Network]
[SMB(Client)]
Item [SMB(Client)]
Description
Select whether to send documents using SMB. Value: [Off], [On]
[SNMP]
[SNMP]
Item
Description
Select whether to communicate using SNMP. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[SMTP]
[SMTP]
Item
Description
Select whether to send Email using SMTP. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[POP3]
[POP3]
Item
Description
Select whether to send Email using POP3. Value: [Off], [On]
[RAW Port]
[RAW Port]
Item
Description
Set whether to receive documents using the Raw Port. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[LPD]
[LPD]
Item
Description
Set whether to send documents using LPD. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
393
System Menu > [System/Network]
[IPP]
[IPP]
Item
Description
Set whether to send documents using IPP. To use this, select [On] for this setting, and select [Off] for in the . Then select [Secure Only (IPPS)] in the security settings from Command Center RX. The factory default port number is 631.
Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
[IPP over TLS]
Item [IPP over TLS]
Settings
Sets whether to receive documents using TLS-protected IPP. To use this, select [On] in these settings, and select [On] for in the . The factory default port number is 443. In [Security] set [TLS Setting] to [On]. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
If the setting is [On], a TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine.
[HTTP]
[HTTP]
Item
[HTTPS]
[HTTPS]
Item
[LDAP]
Select whether to use LDAP.
Description Select whether to communicate using HTTP. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
Description Set whether to communicate using HTTPS. In [Security] set [TLS Setting] to [On]. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
394
System Menu > [System/Network]
[LDAP]
Item
[ThinPrint]
[ThinPrint]
Item
Description Set whether to communicate using HTTPS. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
Settings Set whether to use ThinPrint. To use this, select [On] in these settings. The factory default port number is 4000. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
This feature does not appear if the optional ThinPrint Option is not running.
[ThinPrintOverTLS]
To use ThinPrint over TLS, select [On] for this setting, and for in the , select [On].
Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
If the setting is [On], a TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine.
[Available Net.]
[WSD-SCAN]
Item [WSD-SCAN]
[WSD-PRINT]
Item [WSD-PRINT]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired by selecting [Detail]. Value: [Disabled], [Enabled]
Description Select whether to use WSD-SCAN. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
Description Select whether to communicate using WSD-PRINT. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
395
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Enhanced WSD]
Item [Enhanced WSD]
Description
Set whether to use our proprietary web services. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[EnhancedWSD(TLS)]
Item [EnhancedWSD(TLS)]
Description
Set whether to use our proprietary Web service on TLS. In [Security] set [TLS Setting] to [On]. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[eSCL]
[eSCL]
Item
Description
Sets whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On]
[eSCL over TLS]
Item [eSCL over TLS]
Description
Sets whether to receive scanned documents using TLS-protected eSCL. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. In [Secure Settings] set [TLS] to [On]. Value: [Off], [On]
[REST]
[REST]
Item
Description
Set whether to send documents using REST. To use this, select [On] in these settings. The factory default port number is 9080. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On] 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
396
System Menu > [System/Network]
[REST over TLS]
Item [REST over TLS]
Description
Select whether to communicate using REST protected by TLS. To use this, select [On] in these settings. The factory default port number is 9081. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
[VNC(RFB)overTLS]
Item [VNC(RFB)overTLS]
Description
Set when using a remote operation protected by TLS by starting up a VNC Viewer other than ours (example: Real VNC). The factory default port number is 9063. In [Security] set [TLS Setting] to [On]. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
If the setting is [On], a TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
[VNC (RFB)]
[VNC (RFB)]
Item
Description
Set when using a remote operation by starting up a VNC Viewer other than ours (example: Real VNC). The factory default port number is 9062. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
397
System Menu > [System/Network]
[EnhncdVNC ov TLS]
Item [EnhncdVNC ov TLS]
Description
Start Command Center RX and set for using TLS-protected remote operation. The factory default port number is 9061. In [Security] set [TLS Setting] to [On]. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
If the setting is [On], a TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
398
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Secure Settings]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys >[Network Setting] > [OK] key > [Secure Settings] > [OK] key > [TLS] > [OK] key Set whether to use TSL for communication. Value: [Off], [Off]
399
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Ping]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Ping] > [OK] key
[Ping]
Item
Description
Check if you can communicate with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the destination.
400
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Restart Network]
Item [Restart Network]
Restarts the network.
Description
401
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Primary Network]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Primary Network] > [OK] key Configure the network to use when connecting for sending function, network authentication, and extended address books. Value: [Wi-Fi], [Wired Network]
402
System Menu > [System/Network]
[I/F Block Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [I/F Block Set.] > [OK] key
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
Item [USB Host] [USB Device] [USB Storage]
Description
Block and protect the USB port and USB port (USB Host). Block and protect the USB interface connector (USB Device). Block and protect the USB memory slot. Value: [Unblock], [Block]
NOTE This function can be configured when the USB host is set to [Block].
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
403
System Menu > [System/Network]
[SecurityQuickSet]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [SecurityQuickSet] > [OK] key
Item [SecurityQuickSet]
Description
Select security settings from levels 1 to 3 that are close to your environment, and change (customize) the functions as needed. Value
[Level 1] The factory default setting.
[Level 2] The security function of the network will change.
[Level 3] All functions that protect the machine are enabled, and functions that do not protect the machine are disabled.
NOTE
· This function can be set only when logged in with administrator privileges. Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator (page 107)
· Restart the device or network after selecting a level for the settings to take effect. [Restart Network] (page 382)
[Restart] (page 407) · If you change the security settings after selecting a level, the
security quick setups will show as "Custom". · For more information on each security level setting, refer to the
following: Security Quick Setup Function List (page 791)
404
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Data Security]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Data Security] > [OK] key Configure settings related to data stored in memory.
[DataSanitization]
This function returns the following information stored in the machine to the factory default. · Address Book · System Settings · Fax Send/Receive/Transfer Data · Outgoing and Incoming Fax Log · Local Fax Station Name · Local Fax Station Number · Optional applications
IMPORTANT
Job box data saved in applications or SD cards cannot be deleted. If you want to erase this, you need to format the SD card.
NOTE
· Print [DataSanitization] and check that security data has definitely been erased. [Report Print] (page 367)
· You cannot cancel a process in the middle. · Disconnect any modular or network cables before performing this operation. · Before executing this function, set all to .
[I/F Block Set.] (page 403) · Do not turn off the power during data sanitization. If the power is turned off during erasing, erasing will
be performed automatically after the power is turned on, but complete operation cannot be guaranteed.
Item [Run Immediately] [Schedule]
[Device use]
Settings
Execute security data sanitization.
The address information and image data in the machine will be completely erased at the specified time. Value: > Set [Off], [On] > the date and time If you select [OnOn], set the date and time for complete erasure. Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), and Hour (0 to 23).
After data sanitization, the usage of this machine will be restricted. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] If [Prohibit] is selected, machine operation is disabled.
405
System Menu > [System/Network]
[SW Verification]
Verify the software in the machine. Select [Start] to run the verification. If you experience any abnormalities in software verification, contact your service representative.
406
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Restart]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Restart] > [OK] key
[Restart]
Item
Description
Restart the machine without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine.
407
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Op Functions]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Op Functions] > [OK] key
Item [Op Functions]
Description
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Value: [UG-33], [ID Card] Overview of the Applications (page 757)
408
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Remote Serv.Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Remote Serv.Set.] > [OK] key > [Remote Services] > [OK] key When the trouble occurs on this product, it is possible to explain the operational procedure and the troubleshooting method through the internet from our sales office by accessing the operation panel screen of this product while operating the screen.
NOTE When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company. Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.
409
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Software Version]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Software Version] > [OK] key
[System] [Engine]
Item
Description
You can check the version of the system software installed on this machine.
You can check the version of the engine software installed on this machine.
410
System Menu > [System/Network]
[FAX Server Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [FAX Server Set.] > [OK] key > [FAX] > [OK] key
[FAX]
Item
[Address Settings]
Description
Select whether to use the Fax Server. Value: [Off], [OnOn] Set the prefix, suffix and domain name to attach to the destination.
NOTE
For information about the fax server, contact the fax server administrator.
[File Format] [AddrBookDefaults]
Set the default type of the files. Value: [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS]
Set an Address Book to use. Value: [Address Book], [Ext Address Book]
NOTE
· Displayed when [OnOn] is set on the fax server. · If the extended address book is not set, [Ext Address Book] is not
displayed. Command Center RX User Guide
411
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Managed by Admin]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Managed by Admin] > [OK] key
Item [Managed by Admin]
Description
If you are the same user of this machine as the administrator, such as at home or in a small office, you will be able to use functions that require logging in as an administrator without logging in. Value: [Yes], [No]
412
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Remote Operation]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Remote Operation] > [OK] key > [Remote Ope. Set.] > [OK] key
Item [Remote Ope. Set.]
[Use Restriction]
Description
Set whether to use Remote Operation. Value: [Off], [On] Set usage authority. Set value: [Off]
Users with no administrator privileges can perform remote operation. [Use Password]
Enter the password for remote operation. [Admin. Only]
Only administrators can perform remote operations.
NOTE
· This setting is available when [Remote Ope. Set.] is [On]. · If you selected [Admin. Only], remote operation from VNC software
is not possible.
[VNC Comp. Soft]
Display whether VNC compatible software can be used.
413
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Admin FW Update]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Admin FW Update] > [OK] key
Item [FW Update Tool]
Description
Set whether to allow firmware updates using the firmware update tool. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit]
414
System Menu > [System/Network]
[FW Update Tool]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [FW Update Tool] > [OK] key Value: [Permit], [Prohibit]
415
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Allowlisting]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Allowlisting] > [OK] key
Item [Allowlisting]
Description
In case if the unauthorized program or the program that has tampered are installed, the stored data or the contents of the communication in this program might be stolen. Once this function is activated, execution of the unauthorized software or the tampering of the software can be prevented, and possible to maintain the reliability of the system.
Value: [On], [Off]
NOTE
· After setting it to [On], you need to shutdown and restart the machine.
· Enabling this feature slows the machine start-up.
· If malware is detected, an event report can be used as a way to understand its content. The Event reports can be enable by the Command Center RX > "Notification/Report" > [Recipient 1 E-mail Address] to [Recipient 3 E-mail Address] and [Notify when Malicious Program is Detected] is set to [On].
416
System Menu > [System/Network]
Rem. Print Jobs
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Rem. Print Jobs] > [OK] key
Item [Rem. Print Jobs]
Description
These settings are for print jobs that require security considerations, such as passwords. If you select [Cancel], any user attempts to log out will be aborted, including any jobs waiting to print. Value: [Cancel], [Continue]
417
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Secure Boot]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Secure Boot] > [OK] key
Item [Secure Boot]
Description
Secure Boot is a function that detects tampering with the BIOS or firmware when starting the machine. It verifies the electronic signature given to the BIOS or firmware, and stops the execution of the BIOS or firmware if tampering is detected.
Value: [BIOS + Firmware], [BIOS]
418
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Import/Export]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Import/Export] > [OK] key
Item [Import/Export]
Description
Request approval from the administrator when importing/exporting data. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
419
System Menu > [User/Job Account]
[User/Job Account]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > Value: [User Login Set.], [Job Account.Set.] Configures settings related to machine management. [User Login Set.]
Item [User Login]
[Local User List]
[Local Authoriz.] [Account Lockout]
[Password Policy] [ID Card Settings]
[Guest Auth. Set.] [QuickJobPrinting] [Job Account.Set.]
Description
Value: [Off], [Local Authentic.], [Netwk Authentic.] [Netwk Authentic.] Value: [NTLM] > [Use default host] > host name, [for each domain] > host name [Kerberos] > [Use default host] > host name, [for each domain] > host name, [Ext.] > host name
Value: [Admin], [DeviceAdmin] [Menu] Value: [Detail/Edit] > [Edit] Edit user name [Delete] > [Yes], [No] [Add User] > Add user name
Value: [Off], [On]
Value: [Lockout], [Lockout Policy] [Lockout] Value: [Off], [On] [Lockout Policy] Value: [Number ofRetries] > 1 - 10 times, [Lockout Duration] > 1 - 60 minutes, [Lockout Duration] > [All], [Remote Only]
Value: [Password Policy] > [Off], [On]
Value: [Key Login], [Additional Auth.] [Key Login] Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] [Additional Auth.] Value: [Off], [On]
Value: [Guest Auth.], [Guest Property] [Guest Auth.] Value: [Off], [On] [Guest Property] > [Edit] > Edit user name
[DispListOnLogin] Value: [Off], [On]
Item [Job Accounting] [AccountingAccess] [Account. Report]
Value: [Off], [On] Value: [Local], [Network] Value: [Yes], [No]
420
Description
System Menu > [User/Job Account]
Item [Total JobAccounting]
[Each Job Account]
[Account. List] [Default Setting]
[Unknown User]
Description
Value: [Printed Pages], [Scanned Pages], [FAX TX Pages], [FAX TX Time], [Counter Reset] [Printed Pages] Value: [Copy/Print Pages], [FAX RX Pages], [Total PrintPages], [Duplex Pages], [Combine Pages] [Counter Reset] > [Yes], [No]
[Others] Value: [Printed Pages], [Scanned Pages], [FAX TX Pages], [FAX TX Time], [Counter Reset] [Printed Pages] Value: [Copy/Print Pages], [FAX RX Pages], [Total PrintPages], [Duplex Pages], [Combine Pages]
[Menu] Value: [Detail/Edit], [Delete], [Add Account] > Add department name
Value: [Apply Limit], [Copy/Print Count], [Counter Limit] [Apply Limit] Value: [Immediately], [Subsequently], [Alert Only] [Copy/Print Count] Value: [Total], [Individual] [Counter Limit] Value: [Copy Restrict.] > 1 - 9999999 , [Print Restrict.] > 1 - 9999999, [ScanRest.(Other)] > 1 - 9999999, [FAX Restrict.] > 1 - 9999999
Item
[Unknown ID Job]
Value: [Reject], [Permit ]
Overview of User Login Administration (page 479) Overview of Job Accounting (page 512) Unknown User Settings (page 534)
Description
421
System Menu > [User Property]
[User Property]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Property] > [OK] key View information about the currently logged-in user and modify some information. Enable User Login Administration (page 481)
422
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Common Settings]
Configure overall machine operation. Details are below.
[Language]
Item
[Default Screen] [Sound] [Display Bright.] [Orig./Paper Set.] [Preset Limit] [Measurement] [Error Handling] [Date/Time] [Timer Setting] [Function Default] [Login Operation]
[RAM Disk Mode] [Format SD Card] [Disp. Status/Log] [Keyboard Lang.]
Description
Set the language to use for the message display, and select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. [Language] (page 424)
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). Default Screen (page 425)
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. [Sound] (page 426)
Set the brightness of the message display. Display Bright. (page 427)
Configure the original and paper settings. [Orig./Paper Set.] (page 430)
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Preset Limit (page 436)
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Measurement (page 437)
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. [Error Handling] (page 438)
Configures settings related to the date and time. [Date/Time] (page 439)
Configures settings related to the time. [Timer Setting] (page 440)
Set the defaults for functions for this machine. [Function Default] (page 442)
Select the login user name/login password entry screen to be used during login. Login Operation (page 449)
Create a RAM disk and set its capacity. [RAM Disk Mode] (page 450)
Format the SD card. Format SD Card (page 451)
Set the display of Job Status/Jobs History. [Disp. Status/Log] (page 452)
Select the keyboard input language. Keyboard Lang. (page 453)
423
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Item [Keyboard Type] [Low Toner Alert]
[MaintenanceAlert]
[Remote Printing]
[Direct PRN (Web)] [Show PowerOffMsg]
[EnergySaver Set.] [Pause/Resume Set] [CloudConnectSet.]
Description
Select the keyboard input language. [Keyboard Type] (page 454)
Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the toner is running low. Low Toner Alert (page 455)
Set the timing at which the administrator will be notified of the period remaining before the upcoming scheduled inspection when it is near. [MaintenanceAlert] (page 456)
Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine. [Remote Printing] (page 457)
Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Command Center RX. [Direct PRN (Web)] (page 458)
Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off. Show PowerOffMsg (page 459)
Configure the Energy Saver settings. EnergySaver Set. (page 460)
Select whether to permit for the pausing or resuming of all printing. [Pause/Resume Set] (page 461)
Select whether to permit for coordination between this product and our company's cloud service. CloudConnectSet. (page 462)
[Language]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ [OK] key
Value: [English], [German], [French], [Spanish], [Italian], [Dutch], [Russian], [English]
] keys > [Language] >
424
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Default Screen]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Default Screen] > [OK] key Value: [Status], [Copy], [Send], [FAX], [Document Box]
425
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Sound]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Sound] > [OK] key Value: [Buzzer], [FAX Speaker], [FAX]
426
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Display Bright.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Image Quality] > [OK] key Value: [Darker -3], [Darker -2], [Darker -1], [Normal 0], [Lighter +1], [Lighter +2], [Lighter +3]
427
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Media Type Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Media Type Set.] [OK] keys Select weight for each media type. The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Paper Weight
Weight (g/m2) and Media Type
Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1*1 Heavy 2*1 Heavy 3*1
52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 60 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 136 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 164 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal. Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Media Type
Default
[Plain] [Vellum] [Labels] [Recycled] [Preprinted] [Bond] [Cardstock] [Color] [Prepunched] [Letterhead] [Envelope] [Thick] [Coated] [High Quality] [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
[Normal 1] [Normal 1] [Heavy 1] [Normal 1] [Normal 2] [Normal 3] [Heavy 3] [Normal 1] [Normal 1] [Normal 2] [Heavy 2] [Heavy 2] [Normal 3] [Normal 1] [Normal 1]
For [Custom 1] to [Custom 8], settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
428
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Duplex Printing]
[Permit] [Prohibit]
Item
Description Duplex printing allowed. Duplex printing not allowed.
[Name]
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Character Entry (page 759)
429
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Orig./Paper Set.]
Custom Orig.Size
Configure settings for originals. Set up frequently-used custom original size. The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] > [Custom Orig.Size] > [OK] key Value Metric
X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Inch X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) X=Length, Y=Width
Detect Orig.(DP)
Set whether to use the document processor to detect the original size. Platen cannot automatically detect the original size. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Detect Orig.(DP)] > [OK] key
430
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Item [Auto Detect]
[System of Units] [LGL / OFII / 216 x 340]
Description
[Detect Std.Size]
Select whether to enable automatic detection of the Standard Size. The size that can be detected is A6, B6, A5, B5, A4, and Folio in the case of centimeter size. For inch size, Statement, Letter, and only one of Legal, Officio II, or 216mm x 340mm.
Value: [OffOff], [OnOn] [Non-Std.(Copy)]
Set whether to detect non-standard size documents in the copy function. This setting takes precedence over the automatic (standard size) setting.
Value: [OffOff], [OnOn] [Non-Std.(Send)]
Set whether to detect non-standard size documents in the send or save function. This setting takes precedence over the automatic (standard size) setting.
Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Select [Metric]Metric when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select [Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.
Value: [Metric], [Inch]
Since the third item options to be auto detected in inch are similar in size, set which size to use.
This function is displayed when [Inch] is set to "System of Units".
Value: [Legal], [OficioII], [216 x 340 mm]
[Def. Orig. Size]
Set the default value for the original size.
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Def. Orig. Size] > [OK] key Value [OffOff]*1, [A4],[A5], [A6], [B5], [B6],[Folio], [16 × 340 mm], [letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Envelope #10], [Envelope #9], [Envelope #6], [Envelope Monarch], [Envelope DL], [Envelope C5], [Cardstock], [Oufuku], [Youkei 4], [Youkei 2], [Nagagata 3], [Nagagata 4], [Younaga 3] *1: It is displayed when [Auto Detect] > [Detect Std.Size] of [Detect Orig.(DP)] is set to [OnOn].
[Custom PaperSize]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Custom PaperSize] > [OK] key Set up frequently-used custom paper size. Register one custom size for each paper source. The registered size is displayed when the paper size is selected.
431
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Item
[Cassette 1 Size] to [Cassette 3 Size]
Description
Register the custom size to be used in Cassette 1 to Cassette 3. Value:
Metric X: 105 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
[MF Tray Size]
Register the custom size to be used in MP Tray. Value:
Metric X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
[Cassette 1 Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] key > [ Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [ Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Cassette 1 Set.] [Cassette 3 Set.] > [OK] key Set the size of paper used in cassettes 1 to 3.
432
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Item [Cassette 1 Size] to [Cassette 3 Size]
[Cassette 1 Type] to [Cassette 3 Type]
Description
Select the paper size. [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [Oficio II], [Folio] [216 x 340 mm], [16K], [ISO B5] [Custom]
Select the media type. Value: [Plain], [Vellum], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
· To change to a media type other than "Plain" refer to the following.
[Media Type Set.] (page 428)
· When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
· To print on Preprinted, Prepunched or Letterhead, refer to the following:
SpcialPaper Act. (page 434)
[MF Tray Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [MF Tray Set.] > [OK] key Value [MF Tray Size]: A4, A5, A5-R, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 6K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Cardstock, Oufuku, youkei 4, youkei 2, Youkei 3, nagagata 3, nagagata 4, Custom [MF Tray Type]: Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, lLabels, Recycled, Preprinted Bond, Hagaki, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 Custom 8
[Media Type Set.]
The following media type and paper weight combinations are available. For Custom 1 to 8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. [Media Type Set.] (page 428)
[Media for Auto]
When Auto is selected for Paper Selection, you can limit the paper that is automatically selected by paper type. For example, if [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specified size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specified size. Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency (OHP film),[Vellum], Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
433
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Def. PaperSource]
Select the default paper source. Value: Cassette 1 to Cassette 3, MP Tray
NOTE [Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
[SpcialPaper Act.]
When printing on Prepunched, Preprinted, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down due to a combination of copying functions and the way originals are set. In such a case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority]. If [Adj. PrintDirect] is selected, load paper according to the steps below. Example: copying on Letterhead
434
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Paper Setup Msg]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Paper Settings] > [OK] key > [Paper Setup Msg] > [OK] key Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for each cassette.
Item
[Cassette 1] to [Cassette 3] [MP Tray]
Value: [Off], [On]
Description
NOTE
[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed. [Cassette 2]: Paper Feeder (250-sheet) [Cassette 3]: Paper Feeder (250-sheet)
435
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Preset Limit]
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Preset Limit] > [OK] key Value: 1 to 999 copies
436
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Measurement]
Select inch or millimeter for the unit for paper dimensions. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Measurement] > [OK] key Setting value: Inch, mm
437
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Error Handling]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Error Handling] > [OK] key
Item [DuplexPaperError]
[PaperMismatchErr]
[PermissionJobErr]
Description
Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media types. Value [1-sided]: Printed in 1-sided. [Display Error]: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray. Value [Ignore]: The setting is ignored and the job is printed. [Display Error]: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Set which users can cancel or continue operations for jobs which were paused due to an error. Value: [All Users], [Job Owner Only]
NOTE Administrator can cancel all jobs regardless of this setting.
438
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Date/Time]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Date Setting] > [OK] key
Configures settings related to the date and time.
Item [Date/Time]
Description
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as Email, the date and time set on the machine will be displayed on the header.
Value: [Year] (2000 to 2035), [Month] (1 to 12), [Day] (1 to 31), [Hour] (00 to 23), [min.] (00 to59), [sec.] (00 to 59)
Setting Date and Time (page 64)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.
[Date Format] [Time Zone]
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Value: [Month/Day/Year], [Day/Month/Year], [Year/Month/Day]
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list.
If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (page 64)
439
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Timer Setting]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Timer Setting] > [OK] key Configures settings related to the time.
[Auto Panel Reset]
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to [PanelReset Timer]. PanelReset Timer (page 440)
[PanelReset Timer]
If you select On for Auto Panel Reset, you can set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE This function is displayed when is set to On.
[Sleep Rules]
Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually: This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery controller is installed. · ID Card Reader
(Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.) · Application Value: Off, On
NOTE If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.
[Sleep Timer]
Set amount of time before entering Sleep. Value: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments) Sleep (page 78)
440
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Power Off Rule]
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select [On] to set the Power Off mode. · Network · FAX · USB Cable · USB Host · RAM Disk · Remote Diag. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [FAX] is set to [Off] the machine does not either Power Off Mode. Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
Power Off Timer
Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity. Value: [1 hour], [2 hours], [3 hours], [4 hours], [5 hours], [6 hours], [9 hours], [12 hours], [1 day], [2 days], [3 days], [4 days], [5 days], [6 days], [1 week]
[Auto Err. Clear]
If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. Value: [Off], [On]
[Err. Clear Timer]
If you selected Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically resuming printing. Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This setting is available when [Err. Clear Timer] is [On].
[Unusable Time]
Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes. FAX Operation Guide
[Ping Timeout]
Set the time until timeout occurs when "Network Setting" is executed in [Ping]. Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
441
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Function Default]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] > [Function Default] > [OK] key
[Def.Orig.(Copy)]
Item [Def.Orig.(Copy)]
Description
Set the default value for the original size when copying. If [Auto(Non-Std.)] in [Common Settings] > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [Detect Orig.(DP)] > [Auto Detect] is [OffOff], the size set in the default document size is displayed as a selection. Value: [Auto(Non-Std.)], [A4]
[Def.Orig.(Send)]
Item [Def.Orig.(Send)]
Description
Set the default value for the original size when sending. If [Detect Std.Size] in [Common Settings] > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [Detect Orig.(DP)] > [Auto Detect] is [OffOff], the size set in the default document size is displayed as a selection.
[DuplexOrg(Copy)]
Item [DuplexOrg(Copy)]
Description
Set the default value for the original size when copying. Value: [1-sided], [Duplex]
[DuplexOrg(Send)]
Item [DuplexOrg(Send)]
Description
Set the default value for double-sided originals when sending. Value: [1-sided], [Duplex]
[Duplex Printing]
Item [Duplex Printing]
Description
Sets the default value for printing (single-sided or double-sided printing). Value: [1-sided], [Duplex]
442
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Color Selection]
Item [Color Selection]
Description
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. Value: [Auto (Color/Gray)], [Auto (Color/B & W)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], [Black & White]
[Scan Resolution]
Item [Scan Resolution]
Description
Select the default scanning resolution for scanning documents. Value: [200x100dpi Normal], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin], [300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin], [600x600dpi]
[FAX Resolution]
FAX Operation Guide
[Orig.Image(Copy)]
Item [Orig.Image(Copy)]
Description
Set the default original document type for copying. Value: [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [Graphic/Map]
[Orig.Image(Send)]
Item [Orig.Image(Send)]
Description
Set the default original document type(when sending). Value: [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [for OCR], [Light Text/Line]
NOTE
[for OCR] is a color selection and is only available when [Auto (Color/B & W)] or [Black & White] is selected.
[Zoom]
[Zoom]
Item
Description
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. Value: [100%], [Auto]
443
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Collate]
[Collate]
Item
Set the defaults for Collate. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Description
[Orig.Orientation]
Item [Orig.Orientation]
Description
Set the original orientation defaults. Value: [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
[Backgrnd(Copy)]
Item [Backgrnd(Copy)]
Description
Set the default Background Density (Copy). Value: [OffOff], [Auto], [Manual(Darker 5)]
[Backgrnd(Send)]
Item [Backgrnd(Send)]
Description
Set the default Background Density (when sending). Value: [OffOff], [Auto], [Manual(Darker 5)]
[EcoPrint]
[EcoPrint]
Item
Select the EcoPrint default. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Description
[Prevent B-t Copy]
Item [Prevent B-t Copy]
Description
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy). Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[Prevent B-t Send]
Item [Prevent B-t Send]
Description
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (when sending). Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
444
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Border Erase def]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] > [Function Default] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] > [Border Erase def] > [OK] key
Item [B Erase Copy] [B Erase Send] [B Erase FAX] [Border]
[Gutter]
[Back Page]
Description
Set the defaults for B Erase Copy. Value: [Standard], [Collate], [Book], [Individual]
Set the defaults for B Erase Send. Value: [Standard], [Full Scan], [Collate], [Book], [Individual]
Set the defaults for B Erase FAX. [Standard], [Full Scan], [Collate], [Book], [Individual]
To specify border erase widths around original, set the defaults for the border erase width of the outer frame. Value: [Centimeter]: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) [Inch]: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
To specify border erase widths in the center of the original, set the defaults for the border erase width of the middle frame. Value: [Centimeter]: 0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) [Inch]: 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. Value: [Same as Front], [Do Not Erase]
[Skip Blank(Copy)]
Item [Skip Blank(Copy)]
Description
Select the default Skip Blank(Copy) setting. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[Skip Blank(Send)]
Item [Skip Blank(Send)]
Description
Select the default Skip Blank(Send) setting. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
445
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[File Name Entry]
Item [File Name Entry]
Description
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set. Value: [FileName]: Up to 32 characters can be entered. [Additional Info.], [None], [Date], [Job No.], [Job No. + Date], [Date + Job No.]
[Subject/Body]
Item [Subject/Body]
Description
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail. Value: [Subject]: Up to 60 characters can be entered. [Body]: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
[Con.scan-Copy]
Item [Con.scan-Copy]
Description
Select the default Continuous Scan (Copy) setting. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[Con.scan-FAX]
FAX Operation Guide
[Con.scan-Others]
Item [Con.scan-Others]
Description
Set the default for continuous scanning other than copy and fax. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[File Format]
Item [File Format]
Description
Set the default type of the files. Value: [PDF] > [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG], [OpenXPS], [High Comp.PDF]
446
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[File Separation]
Item [File Separation]
Description
Select the default file separation setting. Value: [OffOff], [Each Page]
[JPEG/TIFF Print]
Item [JPEG/TIFF Print]
Description
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. Value: [Paper Size], [Image Resolution], [Print Resolution]
[XPS FitTo Page]
Item [XPS FitTo Page]
Description
Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[FoldingDetection]
Item [FoldingDetection]
Description
If you select [OnOn], when scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[Clarify Text]
Item [Clarify Text]
Description
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
[ID Card Copy]
Select the default ID Card Copy setting.
Item [ID Card Copy]
Layout[Layout]
Description
No card position specified or set it to top left. Value: [Free], [Upper Left] Sets the copy position on the paper to center or top right. Value: [Align UpperRight], [Align Center]
447
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Clear Job Set.]
Item [Clear Job Set.]
Description
Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job starts. Value: [Clear], [Do Not Clear]
[Detail Setting]
Item [2 in 1 Layout] [4 in 1 Layout]
[Border Line] [Orig. Bind(Copy)] [Orig. Bind(Send)] [Finish. Binding] [Image Quality] [Color TIFF Comp.] [PDF/A] [High Comp.PDF] [ItemsToSkip Copy] [ItemsToSkip Send]
Description
Sets the defaults when a 2-in-1 layout is selected for page aggregation. Value: [L to R], [T to B], [R to L], [B to T]
Sets the defaults when a 4-in-1 layout is selected for page aggregation. Value: [Right then Down], [Down then Right], [Left then Down], [Down then Left]
Set the defaults for the page aggregation border. Value: [None], [Solid Line], [Dotted Line],
Set the default binding orientation for double-sided scanning (copy). Value: [Left/Right], [Top]
Set the default binding orientation for double-sided scanning (Send). Value: [Left/Right], [Top]
Select default binding orientation for duplex mode. Value: [Left/Right], [Top]
Sets the default quality for PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS files. Value: [1 Low(High Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)]
Set the defaults for compression method for TIFF images. Value: [TIFF V6], [TTN2]
Select the default PDF/A setting. Value: [OffOff], [PDF/A-1a], [PDF/A-1b]
Select the default PDF/A setting. Value: [Comp. Priority], [Normal], [Quality Priority]
Set the defaults for the blank page detection level (Copy). Value: [Blank+Ruled Line], [Blank Pages Only], [Blank+Some Text]
Set the defaults for the blank page detection level (Send). Value: [Blank+Ruled Line], [Blank Pages Only], [Blank+Some Text]
448
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Login Operation]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ Operation] > [OK] key Select the login user name/login password entry screen to be used during login. Value: [Use Numeric Key], [Select Character]
] keys > [Login
449
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[RAM Disk Mode]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [RAM Disk Mode] > [OK] key Create a RAM disk and set its capacity. You can print print data from the job box by creating a RAM disk. Value: [Off], [On] If you select [On], you can set the [RAM Disk Size]. Setting range varies depending on size of onboard memory.
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
450
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Format SD Card]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Format SD Card] > [OK] key Format the SD card. Displayed when the SD card is installed into this machine. To use an SD memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD memory card.
IMPORTANT · Formatting an SD card will erase all of its data. · If installing an application, the application may be deleted so do not format the SD card.
451
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Disp. Status/Log]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Disp. Status/ Log] > [OK] key
[Disp. Status/Log]
Set the display of Job Status/Jobs History.
Item [JobsDetailStatus] [Jobs Log] [FAX Log]
Description Value: [Show All], [My Jobs Only], [Hide All] Value: [Show All], [My Jobs Only], [Hide All] Value: [Show All], [Hide All]
452
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Keyboard Lang.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Keyboard Lang.] > [OK] key Select the keyboard input language. Value: [FollowDisp.Lang.], [English]
453
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Keyboard Type]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Keyboard Type] > [OK] key Select the optional keyboard type. Value: [US-English], [US-English w/EUR], [French], [German], [UK-English]
454
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Low Toner Alert]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Low Toner Alert] > [OK] key Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the toner is running low. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE If [Off] is selected, you will be notified when the toner level reaches 5%. If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in 1% increments).
455
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[MaintenanceAlert]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [MaintenanceAlert]
Item [Notify via Panel]
[NotifyExternally]
Description
Set whether or not to display on the operation panel when a periodic inspection is near. Value: [Off], [Message]
Set the timing at which the administrator will be notified of the period remaining before the upcoming scheduled inspection when it is near. This notification is used for Event Reports, Status Monitors, and SNMPTraps (such as Printing Equipment Management Systems). Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
If is selected, set the alert timing. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in 1% increments).
456
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Remote Printing]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Remote Printing] Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine. When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person from seeing that document. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit]
457
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Direct PRN (Web)]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Direct PRN (Web)] Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Command Center RX. Value: , Command Center RX User Guide
458
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Show PowerOffMsg]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Show PowerOffMsg] > [OK] key Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off. Value: [Off], [On]
459
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[EnergySaver Set.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [EnergySaver Set.]
[Recovery Level]
Item [Recovery Level]
Description
Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Value
[Full Recovery]: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately. However, this mode saves less energy.
[Normal Recovery]: In this mode, you can select the method from the following: enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of desired functions only. If you want to use all functions immediately, select the [Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.
[Power Saving]: This mode enables the use of the functions that you wish to use only. This is the most energy-efficient mode.
460
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Pause/Resume Set]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Pause/Resume Set] Select whether to permit for the pausing or resuming of all printing. Value: [Permit ], [Not Allowed]
461
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[CloudConnectSet.]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [CloudConnectSet.] > [OK] key Set connection and editing restrictions for Cloud Access. Cloud Linkage Function (page 267)
462
System Menu > [Copy]
[Copy]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Copy] > [OK] key
Item [Orig./Paper Set.] [AutoPaperSelect.]
[Auto % Priority] [DP Read Action]
[Select Key Set. Folio]
Description
Set the default paper selection.
Value: [Auto], [Def. PaperSource]
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method for when the zoom changes.
Value:
[MostSuitableSize]: Selects optimum paper size based on the current zoom level and the size of the original.
[Same as Orig. Size]: Selects paper that matches the size of the original, regardless of the zoom level.
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: [Off], [On]
Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor.
Value:
[Speed Priority]: Loading speed is prioritized.
[Quality Priority]: Slightly slows down the loading speed and gives priority to the quality of the original.
You can register frequently used copy functions for the selection key. You can easily set it by selecting the selection key.
Value: [None], [Paper Selection], [Collate], [ID Card Copy] [Duplex], [Zoom], [Combine], [Border Erase], [Original Size], [Orig.Orientation], [Original Image], [Density], [EcoPrint], [Continuous Scan], [File Name Entry], [JobFinish Notice], [Print Override], [Sharpness], [Contrast], [Backgrnd Density], [Prevent Bleed-t], [Erase Colors], [Skip Blank Page]
463
System Menu > [Printer]
[Printer]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Printer] > [OK] key Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
[Emulation Set.]
Item [Emulation Set.]
Description
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers. Value: [NEC PC-PR201], [IBM 5577], [EPSON VP-1000], [PCL6], [KPDL], [KPDL(Auto)]
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set [KPDL Error Rpt], too.
[Alt. Emulation] [KPDL Error Rpt]
[EcoPrint]
Item
[Override A4/LTR]
[Duplex] [Copies] [Orientation] [Wide A4]
If you select [KPDL(Auto)] as the emulation mode, you can automatically switch between KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) depending on the data to be printed. Value: [PCL6]
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is output. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Description
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. Value: [OffOff], [Bind Long Edge], [Bind Short Edge]
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. Value: 1 to 999 copies
Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape]. Value: [Portrait], [Landscape]
Turn this to On to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
464
System Menu > [Printer] Item
[FormFeed TimeOut]
[LF Action] [CR Action] [Job Name]
[User Name] [MP Tray Priority]
[Paper Feed Mode]
Description
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds. Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). Value: [LF Only], [LF and CR], [Ignore LF]
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). Value: [CR Only], [LF and CR], [Ignore CR]
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
NOTE
If you select [On], select from [Job Name], [Job No.+Job Name] or [Job Name+Job No.] to use as the job name.
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed. Value: [Off], [On]
If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed. Value [OffOff]: The printer driver settings are followed. [Auto Feed]: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray. [Always]: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. Value [Auto] Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type. [Fixed] Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
465
System Menu > [Printer] Item
[Auto Cass.Change]
[Resolution]
[KIR] [Job Terminator]
Description
Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing. Value: [OffOff], [OnOn]
NOTE
If you select [OffOff], when the printer runs out of paper, it displays "Load paper in cassette #."(where # is the cassette number) or "Load paper in MP tray." and stops printing. When you load the paper in the cassette displayed in the message, printing resumes. If you wish to print from another cassette, select [Paper]. Select the paper source, and select the [OK] key. When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Set the resolution used for printing. Value: [300dpi], [600dpi], [Fine1200], [Fast1200]
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.
Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting. Value: [Off], [On] You can select the condition which is regarded as a job termination if the print job could not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason. Value [EOJ] The command recognized as a termination of the job data is regarded as one job until it is detected. [End of Session] The data included in a network session at network connection is regarded as one job. [UEL] The UEL included in the termination of the job data is regarded as one job until it is detected.
466
System Menu > [Send]
[Send]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Send] > [OK] key
[Select Key Set. Folio]
Item [Select Key Set. Folio]
Description
You can register frequently used sending functions for the selection key. You can easily set it by selecting the selection key.
Value: [None], [Color Selection], [Original Size], [Original Image], [Scan Resolution], [Sending Size], [Border Erase], [Zoom], [Orig.Orientation], [Continuous Scan], [File Format], [File Name Entry], [Subject/Body], [JobFinish Notice], [FAX Resolution], [FAX Direct TX], [FAX Delayed TX], [FAX RX Polling], [FAX TX Report], [Density], [Clarify Text], [FTP Encrypted TX], [File Separation][Sharpness], [Contrast], [Backgrnd Density], [Saturation], [Prevent Bleed-t], [Erase Colors], [Skip Blank Page]
[DestinationCheck]
Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations. It also applies when sending faxes.
Item [Check beforeSend]
[Check New Dest.]
Description
Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key when performing sending jobs. Value: [Off], [On]
When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. Value: [Off], [On]
Other Items
Item [New Dest. Entry]
[Recall Dest.]
[Broadcast] [Dest.Hist. Usage] [Del.Dest.History]
Description
Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] Select whether to permit direct entry of destination. It also applies when sending faxes. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] Select whether to permit usage of [Redirect] on the Send screen. It also applies when sending faxes. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] Set whether to enable broadcast. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit] Allow to use the destination history. Delete the destination history.
467
System Menu > [Send] Item
[Default Screen] [Send and Forward]
[DigitalSignature]
Item [DigitalSignature]
[Format]
Description Value: [Destination], [Address Book] Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key. Value: [Forward], [Destination] [Forward] Value: [Off], [On] [Destination] Value: [Confirmation] > Destination Check, [Register] > [Address Book], [Address Entry] [Address Book] > Address Registration [Address Entry] Value: [E-mail], [Folder(SMB)], [Folder(FTP)]
Value Select whether to add a digital signature. Value: [Off]
Does not add a digital signature. [Specify Each Job]
Whether to add a digital signature is selected each time of sending. [On] Always adds a digital signature when sending.
NOTE
When [On] is selected, [PDF/A-1b] and [PDF/A-1a] cannot be selected in "PDF/A". PDF/A (page 325)
Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature. Value: [SHA-1], [SHA-256], [SHA-384], [SHA-512]
NOTE
This function is displayed when [DigitalSignature] is set to [Specify Each Job] or [On].
468
System Menu > [Send] Item
[Confirm Password]
[Password]
[E-mail Settings]
Item [Sender Address]
Value Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
This function is displayed when [DigitalSignature] is set to [Specify Each Job].
Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
NOTE
This function is displayed when [DigitalSignature] is set to [Specify Each Job].
Description When the user login is set to ON, login user name, password and E-mail address of login user are used for SMTP authentication and e-mail sender address. Value: [Use Sys. Setting]
SMTP sender address information set with Command Center RX is used for SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information. [Use Login User] Login User information is used for SMTP authentication and Email sender address information.
469
System Menu > [FAX]
[FAX]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ Configures settings for fax functions. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
] keys > [FAX] > [OK] key
470
System Menu > [Document Box]
[Document Box]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Document Box] > [OK] key
[Sub Address Box]
FAX Operation Guide
[Job Box]
FAX Operation Guide
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Document Box] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Box] > [OK] key Configure settings for Job Box.
Item [Quick Copy Jobs]
Description
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE When [0] is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
[JobRet. Deletion]
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
Value: [Off], [1 hour], [4 hours], [1 day], [1 week]
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
[Polling Box]
FAX Operation Guide
471
System Menu > [Application]
[Application]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Application] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications. Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are available. For details, contact your sales representative or dealer.
472
System Menu > [Edit Destination]
[Edit Destination]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key
[Address Book]
[Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key Configure settings for address book. Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 159)
[Edit Restriction]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Restriction] > [OK] key
Item [Address Book]
[One Touch Key]
Description
Restrict editing of the address book. If you select [Admin. Only], you can only edit the Address Book by logging in as administrator. Value: [Off], [Admin. Only]
Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Admin. Only], you can only edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges. Value: [Off], [Admin. Only]
[Print List]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Print List] > [OK] key
Item [Addr Book(Index)] [Addr Book(No.)] [One Touch]
Description
Sets the print content for the Address Book (header). Value: [All], [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX] Sets the print settings for the address book (number). Value: [All], [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX] Sets the print settings for the One-touch list. Value: [All], [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX]
[AddrBookDefaults]
[Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [AddrBookDefaults] > [OK] key
NOTE This function is not displayed if Ext Address Book is not set.
473
System Menu > [Edit Destination]
Item [Address Book]
Description
Configure what type of address book to display. Value: [Machine AddrBook], [Ext Address Book] For information on the Ext Address Book, see the following: Command Center RX User Guide
474
System Menu > [Adjust/Maint.]
[Adjust/Maint.]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key [Copy Denst. Adj.]
Item [Copy Denst. Adj.]
[Send/Box Density]
Description
Makes the overall density of the copy darker or lighter. [-3 Lighter], [-2], [-1], [0 Normal], [+1], [+2], [+3 Darker]
Item [Send/Box Density]
[FAX Denst. Adj.]
Description
Makes the overall reading density darker or lighter when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Value: [-3 Lighter], [-2], [-1], [0 Normal], [+1], [+2], [+3 Darker]
Item [FAX Denst. Adj.]
Description
Make the overall fax reading density darker or lighter. Value: [-3 Lighter], [-2], [-1], [0 Normal], [+1], [+2], [+3 Darker]
[Sharpness Adj.] Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
[Copy]
Item
[Send/Box]
[Contrast (Copy)]
Description
Makes the outline of the image darker or lighter overall when copying. Value: [-3(Grayish)], [-2], [-1], [0], [1], [2], [ 3(Vivid)]
Darkens or lightens the overall outline of the image when sending it or saving it to the document box. Value: [-3(Grayish)], [-2], [-1], [0], [1], [2], [ 3(Vivid)]
Item [Contrast (Copy)]
[Contrast (Send)]
Description
Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies. Value: [-3], [-2], [-1], [0], [1], [2], [3]
Item [Contrast (Send)]
Description
Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document box. Value: [-3], [-2], [-1], [0], [1], [2], [3]
475
System Menu > [Adjust/Maint.]
[Backgrnd Density] Make the overall background darker or lighter.
Item [Copy(Auto)]
[Send/Box(Auto)]
Description
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying. Value: [-3 Lighter], [-2], [-1], [0 Normal], [+1], [+2], [+3 Darker]
Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box. Value: [-3 Lighter], [-2], [-1], [0 Normal], [+1], [+2], [+3 Darker]
[EcoPrint] Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Item [Save Level(Copy)]
[SaveLvl(Printer)]
[Print Density]
Description
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint). Value: [5(Higher)], [4], [3], [2], [1(Lower)] Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint). Value: [5(Higher)], [4], [3], [2], [1(Lower)] Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Item [Print Density]
[AutoColorCorrect]
Description
Make the overall print density darker or lighter. Value: [1 (Lighter)], [2], [3], [4], [5 (Darker)]
Item [AutoColorCorrect]
[Correct. Bk Line]
Description
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: [5], [4], [3], [2], [1]
Item [Correct. Bk Line]
[Clarify Text] Adjust the legibility of characters.
Description
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when the document processor is used. Value: [Off], [On(Low)], [On(High)]
476
System Menu > [Adjust/Maint.]
[Level]
Item
[Noise Removal]
[Service Setting]
Item [Service Setting]
Description Value: [Low], [Middle], [High] Increasing the level will increase the reproduction level of characters. Select whether to remove noise. [Off], [On]
Description Perform the maintenance and inspection of the machine. This menu is primarily used by service personnel for maintenance work.
477
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
Overview of User Login Administration................................................................................479 Enable User Login Administration.........................................................................................481 Setting User Login Administration ........................................................................................482 Overview of Job Accounting ...................................................................................................512 Enable job accounting ............................................................................................................514 Job Accounting .........................................................................................................................515 Set the Job Accounting(Local) ................................................................................................516 Configuring Job Accounting ...................................................................................................525
478
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user name and password for user authentication to login. 1 Enable User Login Administration
Enable User Login Administration (page 481) 2 Set the user
Setting User Login Administration (page 482) 3 Enter the login user name and password and execute the job
Login (page 60)
Managing the Job Account from PC
In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs
Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs. Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC (page 491)
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning. Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 494)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning. Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 495)
479
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC. Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 493) The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
480
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enable User Login Administration
Enable User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item [Local Authentic.]
[Netwk Authentic.]
Description
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Local Authentic.] or [Netwk Authentic.] > [OK] key
· Select [Off] to disable user login administration. · If [Local Authentic.] is selected, set [Local Authentic.].
Local Authorization (page 496) · If [Netwk Authentic.] is selected, set [Server Settings].
Server Settings (page 497)
NOTE
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
481
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration
This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting
You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Account Lockout] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings. Configurable items are as follows: [Lockout] Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled. Value: [Off], [On] [Lockout Policy] Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is applied. Value [Number ofRetries]: Specify how many login retries are allowed until the account is locked out. (1 to 10 times) [Lockout Duration]: Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked. (1 to 60 minutes) [Lockout Target]: Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. Select from [Remote Only] and [All]. Remote Login Only locks out all operations from outside the operation panel. [Locked out Users] Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
482
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Password Policy Settings
You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy. Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Password Policy] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings. Configurable items are as follows: [Password Policy] Select whether or not password policy is enabled. Value: [Off], [On] [Min. PW Length] Set the minimum password length of characters for password. Value: [Off], [On] (1 to 64 characters) [PW Complexity] Set the password complexity. Value [Reject common PW]:Off, On [Include uc ltr.]:Off, On [Include lc ltr.]:Off, On [Include number]:Off, On [Include symbol]:Off, On [Maximum PW Age] Set the maximum password age. Value: [Off], [On] (1 to 180 days) [Violator List] List of users who do not meet password policy requirements.
483
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Adding a User (Local User List)
You can add 100 user (including the default login user name).
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Local User List] > [OK] key > [Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login] > [OK] key
2 Enter the user information.
1 Enter the name to be displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters) and press the [OK] key. 2 Enter the reading (up to 32 characters) of the user name, and then enter the key [OK].
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
3 Enter the login username (up to 64 characters) that you enter when logging in, and select the key [OK].
NOTE The same login user name cannot be registered.
4 To enter detailed user information, press the [ ] [ ] keys > [Detail] > [OK] key 5 To end the operation, press the [ ] [ ] keys > [Exit] > [OK] key 6 Enter the user information details. Select [Edit] [Change] or [Detail] for each item, enter the details,
then select the [OK] key. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. The following items can be set. User Name
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). Furigana
Enter the reading of the user name up to 32 characters.
484
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Login User Name Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. Register if you wish to use E-mail sending. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for user access privileges.
Permit SysAdmin If the user privileges level set in Access Level is [User], select the items for which the user has setting privileges from the following: · Paper · Address Book · User/Job Account · Basic Network · Basic Device · Dev/Net Application Settings
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID. Overview of Job Accounting (page 512)
Cloud User Name This is displayed when the cloud integration function is being used.
ID Card Info. Register ID card information. Place the ID card on the ID card reader.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is activated. Option configuration (page 754)
Local Authoriz. Set usage authority for each user. Print Restrict. Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: Value: [Off], [Reject Usage]
485
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
· Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Copy Restrict. Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited. Value: [Off] , [Reject Usage] Duplex Restrict. Select whether only duplex printing is allowed. Value: [Off], [2-sided Only] CombineRestrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed. Value: [Off], [2in1 & 4in1 Only], [4in1 Only] EcoPrint Restr. Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed. Value: [Off], [EcoPrint Only] Send Restrict. Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited. Value: [Off], [Reject Usage] FAX Restrict. Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited. Displays only for fax models. Value: [Off], [Reject Usage] Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes. Value: [Off], [Reject Usage] StoringIn USBDrv Set whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive. Value: [Off], [Reject Usage] *1 Be sure to enter the items. *2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled. Local Authorization (page 496)
NOTE
· For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry (page 759)
· If you selected or [Fax] in the Default Screen for My Panel, select , , or [External Address Book] as the screen to display.
486
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3 Select the [OK] key. A new user is added on the local user list.
487
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Change the user properties
Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Local User List] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Change the user properties
1 Select the user whose properties you wish to change. [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key
IMPORTANT Users with permissions [User] can register and modify user information only when [User/Job Account] is enabled in [Permit SysAdmin].
2 Configure the settings. · User Name · Login User Name*1 · Login Password · E-mail Address · Access Level*1 · Permit SysAdmin*1 · Account Name · Cloud User Name · ID Card Info. *2 · Authoriz. RulesLocal Authoriz.*3 · My Panel
488
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration · Domain name*4 *1 You can change only when you log in with machine administrator authority. *2 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit(B) AC is activated. Overview of the Applications (page 757) *3 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled. Local Authorization (page 496) For details on each item, refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 484) *4 If the user is a network user with local user privileges, the Domain Name is displayed. Configure Network User Rights (page 498)
3 Select the [Register] key. The user information is changed.
489
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Deleting a user.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Local User List] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Deleting a user.
1 Select the user to delete. 2 [Menu] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key 3 Select [Yes].
The selected user will be deleted. NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted. Administrator Privileges Overview (page 106)
490
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC
To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers]. NOTE
For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers], in that order.
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer Properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator Settings] in the [Device Settings] tab.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [User login] in the [User login] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration. [Use specific Login User Name] This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each print job. [Prompt for name] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
491
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration [Prompt for name andd validate] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the "Login user name" needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is attempted. [Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name] When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names list" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name and password will appear.
3 Click [OK]. NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
492
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers], in that order.
2 Right-click the Fax Driver icon of the machine, and then click the [Printing preferences] menu. 3 Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [FAX Setting] tab.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [User Login] in the [Authentitcation] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration. [Use Specific Login User Name] This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job. [Prompt for Login User Name] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
493
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN
The following TWAIN driver settings are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and enter [TWAIN Driver Setting]. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. Displays the TWAIN Driver Settings screen.
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2 Configure the settings
1 Click [User Authentication Setting]. 2 Select [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
494
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA
The following WIA driver settings are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Please select the Windows [Start] button [Windows Tools] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and Cameras] in the search list, then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears. NOTE · For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel], in that order. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click the [Properties] button.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User Name and Password.
2 Click [OK].
495
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization. NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentic.]. Enable User Login Administration (page 481)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Local Authentic.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > Select [On] or [Off]
496
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Server Settings
Set the server type when network authentication is enabled.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [User Login] > [OK] key > [Netwk Authentic.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Server Type] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select , or as the and select the [OK] key. When or is selected, you can configure multiple authentication servers. Select [Use default host] or [for each domain].
2 Enter the host name (64 characters or less) for the Authentication Server, and select the [OK] key. When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
3 Enter the domain name for the Authentication Server, and select the [OK] key. If domain name is not set, select [----------] and select [Menu]. Select [Edit], select the [OK] key, and enter the domain name (up to 256 characters). Select the [OK] key to register the Default Domain Name. To edit or delete the registered domain, select the registered domain name, and then select [Menu].
NOTE · Up to 10 domain names can be registered. · If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
1 Network Authentication setting of the machine 2 User property of the Authentication Server 3 Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
497
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configure Network User Rights
Select whether or not to grant local user rights to network users. If this setting is applied, when a network user logs in, the logged in network user's information is registered as a local user. By setting the account name on the registered local user information, network users can coordinate with job accounting. Displays the "Domain Name" in the user information for local users with rights.
NOTE · This setting is valid when the server type is [NTLM] . · For local user information, refer to the following: Adding a User (Local User List) (page 484)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [NW User Auth.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings Set [Give Authority] to [On] to configure the settings. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. [User Full Action] Configure the action when the number of users is exceeded when granting local user rights. Value: [Do Not Add New], [Delete Old User] Set the expiration date for local user rights that have been granted and that do not require network authentication. Value: [Always Enabled], [Enabled Period] Select [Period selection], [Enabled Period] or [Period]the period. (1 to 180 days) [Local Auth. Def.] Set the default local user rights that are granted.
498
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group Authorization Settings
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server. NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, "User Login Set." must be selected for the authentication method in [Netwk Authentic.]. In addition, set "ProtocolSettings" to On in "LDAP". Enable User Login Administration (page 481) [ProtocolSettings] (page 392) Settings to enable group authorization are made on the operation panel. Groups must be registered in Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
Group Authorization
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Group Auth.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
499
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Guest Authorization Settings
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are allowed to use.
NOTE To use Guest Authorization, must be enabled in . Enable User Login Administration (page 481)
Enabling Guest Authorization
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Guest Auth.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key NOTE
· If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Logout] must be selected when logging in. · In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use a
different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the guest properties.
500
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configuring Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Guest Auth. Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Guest Property] > [OK] key
2 Register guest user information and functions that are restricted. Select [Edit], [Change] or [Detail] for each item, enter the details, then select the [OK] key. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). The default setting is "Guest User". Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed. Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. If the user does not belong to any account, select . Authoriz. Rules Set usage authority for each user. The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows. Print Restrict. Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive Copy Restrict. Select whether or not to prohibit use of copy print functions. Duplex Restrict. Select whether only duplex printing is allowed. CombineRestrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
501
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration EcoPrint Restr. Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed. Send Restrict. Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited. FAX Restrict. Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited. Displays only for fax models. StoringIn USBDrv Set whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive.
3 Register the user.
1 Select the [OK] key.
502
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. NOTE
· To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Netwk Authentic.] must be selected for the user authentication method in "User Login Set.". In addition, set "ProtocolSettings" to On in [LDAP].
· The settings for obtaining network user property are configured on the operation panel. Further details on the information to be obtained can be set in Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
Enable User Login Administration (page 481) [ProtocolSettings] (page 392)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings [ ] [ ] keys > [NW User Property] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Off] or [On] > [OK] key
503
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Card Authentication Kit Settings
The Card Authentication Kit(B) AC allows user authentication using an ID card.
IMPORTANT
The deployment procedure requires a license key. The license key is issued when the "machine number" of the machine and the "product ID" written on the license certificate of this product are registered on the website specified by the distributor.
For instructions on how to read an ID card, refer to the instructions included with the card reader. In order to perform the local authentication with ID card, ID card information has to be registered to the local user list in advance. To use an ID card for network authentication, you must install KYOCERA Net Manager on the network authentication server. Register a user from the server and enter the ID number of the ID card. For details, refer to KYOCERA Net Manager Install Manual.
CAUTION
This product is an inductive read/write communication equipment which has received the type designation from the Minister for Internal Affairs and Communications based on the Radio Law. Do not use in areas where radio wave usage is restricted. People with implantable medical devices (such as cardiac pacemakers) should use this device at a distance of at least 22 cm from the implanted site. (In general, studies have shown that wireless card "contactless ID card" systems and RFID "electronic tag" devices may have an effect on implantable medical devices.) For details, please visit the Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications website.
Enabling the Card Authentication Kit(B) AC
To perform user authentication using an ID card, you must enable the ID card Authentication Kit. Starting Application Use (page 757)
Set the user login administration
If you enable user login administration on the machine itself, you must set up user login administration for the printer driver in order to print from the computer. Printer Driver User Guide Managing the Job Account from PC (page 479)
Register ID card information.
To log in by ID card, register your ID card information in user information.
NOTE
If the user authentication is displayed, refer to the login or keyboard login procedure and log in using an ID card or login user name registered with administrator authority.
504
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key < [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Local User List] > [OK] key
2 [ ] [ ] keys > Select the user to register the ID card information > [OK] key 3 [ ] [ ] keys > [ID Card Info] > [Change] > [Read] > [OK] key 4 Hold the ID card you want to register over the card reader and select [Read]. If
"Completed. " is displayed, select [Close].
NOTE Depending on the card reader, [Read] may not be displayed.
5 Select [Yes] The user information is changed, "Registered. " is displayed and the ID card information is deleted.
505
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Delete the ID card information
Register ID card information from the user information. NOTE
If the user authentication is displayed, refer to the login or keyboard login procedure and log in using an ID card or login user name registered with administrator authority.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key < [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [ ] [ ] keys > [Local User List] > [OK] key
2 [ ] [ ] keys > Select the user to register the ID card information > [OK] key 3 [ ] [ ] keys > [ID Card Info] > [Change] > [Delete] > [OK] key 4 Select [Yes]
The user information is changed, "Registered. " is displayed and the ID card information is deleted.
506
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type. NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated. Option configuration (page 754)
Key Login
When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by keyboard is allowed.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [ID Card Settings] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Key Login] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Permit] or [Prohibit].
507
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Additional Authentication
Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID card. NOTE
This function is displayed when "User Login" is enabled.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys [ID Card Settings] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Additional Auth.] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Off], [Use Password], or . NOTE
is displayed only when using PIN Code Authorization. PIN Login (page 510)
508
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Simple Job Printing
Displays a list of print jobs saved to the Stored Job Box when logging in with an ID card via user login. NOTE
For details on Simple Job Printing, refer to the following: Simple Job Printing (page 195)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [QuickJobPrinting] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings Set "DispListOnLogin"[On] to configure the settings. [LogoutAfterPrint] Select whether or not to automatically log out after printing. [Skip PIN&Copies] Select whether or not to skip entering the PIN code and confirming the number of copies when printing when a PIN code is set.
509
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
PIN Login
NOTE When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and must be selected for server type. Enable User Login Administration (page 481) Server Settings (page 497)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User Login Set.] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys [PIN Login] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Off] or [On].
510
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following: Login (page 60)
Logout
When the operation is complete, select the [Logout] key. You will return to the login user name/login password entry screen.
511
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting
Job accounting manages the print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. 1 Enable job accounting
Enable job accounting (page 514) 2 Setting an account.
Set the Job Accounting(Local) (page 516) 3 Enter the assigned account ID when performing the job.
Login (page 530) 4 Count the number of pages printed.
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the printer driver on the PC. 1 Set Job Accounting for the PC on the network by using the printer driver.
Job Accounting for Printing (page 520) 2 Execute printing. 3 Count the number of pages printed.
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN
To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer connected to the machine. Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 522)
512
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA
To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer connected to the machine. Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 523)
Managing the FAX Jobs Transmitted from a PC
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver on the PC. Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 524) Fax function is avairable for fax models.
513
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enable job accounting
Enable job accounting
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys [Job Accounting] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings Select [On] to enable job accounting. NOTE When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
514
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting
Job Accounting
Set the Job Accounting method.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [AccountingAccess] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Local], or [Network].
515
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Set the Job Accounting(Local)
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 100100 individual accounts can be added.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Account. List] > [OK] key
2 Add an account.
1 [Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Add Account] > [OK] key Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).
NOTE Any [Account ID] that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
2 To apply usage authority, press the [ ][ ] keys > [Detail] > [OK] key, to end operation, press the [ ][ ] keys > [Exit] > [OK] key
3 Check Account Name and Account ID to set usage authority. To change a setting, select [Edit], enter the details, and select the [OK] key. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 517)
4 Select the [OK] key. A new account is added on the Account List.
516
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
Usage Restriction Items
"Copy/Printer Count Method" is "Individual"
Item
Description
[Print Restrict.] [Print Restrict.] [Scan Restrict.] [FAX Restrict.]
Limits the number of sheets used for copying. Limits the number of sheets used for printing. Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
"Copy/Printer Count Method" is "Total"
Item [Print Restrict.] [Scan Restrict.] [FAX Restrict.]
Description Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax.
Applying Usage Restriction
Usage restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item [Off] [Counter Limit]
[Reject Usage]
Description
No restriction is applied.
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. If you select [Counter Limit], the [Limit Pages] screen will be displayed after you select the [OK] key. Select the numeric keypad, enter the limit number of pages, and select the [OK] key.
Restriction is applied.
517
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Editing an Account
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Account. List] > [OK] key
2 Edit an account
1 Select the account you want to change account information for and select the [OK]. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Detail/Edit] > [OK] key 3 Select the item you wish to change, and select the [Edit] key.
Move items using the [ ][ ] keys. NOTE
Change account information by referring to procedure 2 for followngs. Adding an Account (page 516) Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 517) 4 Select the [OK] key. The account information is changed.
518
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Deleting an Account
1 Display the screen 2 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [Account. List] > [OK] key
3 Deleting
1 Select the account to delete and select [Menu]. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Delete] > [OK] key > [Yes] The account is deleted.
519
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Job Accounting for Printing
To manage the number of pages used for jobs to be printed from the PC, you need to configure the following settings by using the printer driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers], in that order.
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer Properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] in the [Device Settings] tab.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Job Accounting] in the [Job Accounting] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting. [Use Specific Account ID] Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each print job. [Prompt for account ID] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted. [Prompt for account ID and validate] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted. [Display account ID list] The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID to be used needs to be selected from the list. [Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID] When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will appear.
520
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local) 3 Click [OK]. NOTE For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
521
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting". Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. Displays the TWAIN Driver Settings screen.
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2 Configure the settings
1 Click [User Authentication Settings]. 2 Select [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
522
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Please select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list, then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears. NOTE · For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel], in that order. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click the [Properties] button.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2 Click [OK].
523
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Set the Job Accounting(Local)
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the Windows [Start] button > [ ] > [Windows Tools] > [ ] > [Control Panel] > [ ] > [Devices and Printers]. NOTE For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers], in that order.
2 Right-click the Fax Driver icon of the machine, and then click the [Printing preferences] menu. 3 Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [FAX Setting] tab.
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Job Accounting] in the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting. [Use Specific Account ID] This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each FAX job. [Prompt for Account ID] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
524
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999. The items that can be set differ depending on whether or is selected for . Copier/Printer Count (page 533)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Default Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > "Counter Limit" > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select the item for > [+]. [-], or the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets > [OK] If [Copy/Print Count] is [Individual] [Copy Restriction] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying. [Print Restrict.] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC [ScanRest.(Other)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). [FAX Restrict.] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. Displays only for fax models. If [Copy/Print Count] is [Individual] [Print Restrict.] Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
525
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. Displays only for fax models.
526
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
Total for all departments
This counts the number of pages for each account. In addition, you can reset the counts for all accounts at the same time.
Total by department
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
The number of sheets used is counted according to the following items.
[Printed Pages]
The number of copies, printers and the total for both is displayed. You can also check the number of each used pages in [FAX RX Pages][Duplex Pages][Combine Pages].
Item [Copy/Print Pages]
[FAX RX Pages] [Total PrintPages] [Duplex Pages]
[Combine Pages]
Description
The number of copies, printers and the total for both is displayed.
Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
Number of faxes received is displayed.
The total number of pages used is displayed.
[1-sided], [Duplex] and the total number of used pages can be checked.
Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
[None] (None combine) [2 in 1] [4 in 1] and the total number of used pages can be checked.
Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
[Scanned Pages] Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, for faxing, and for other functions, as well as the total number of pages used.
Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page.
[FAX TX Pages] Number of pages faxed is displayed.
[FAX TX Time] Total duration of FAX transmissions is displayed.
[Counter Reset] Resets the counter. Select [Reset] on the confirmation screen.
Counting the Number of Pages for All Accounts
This counts the number of pages for each account. In addition, you can reset the counts for all accounts at the same time.
527
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages for Each Account
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Each Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Check the number of pages.
1 Select the department to view the consolidation> [OK] key NOTE
· Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list. · To display an account other than your own account, select [Others]. 2 Check the count. Select [Counter Reset] > [Yes] to reset the counter. 3 Confirm the count and select the [OK] key.
528
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
1 Prepare paper. Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
2 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key
3 Execute printing.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Account. Report] > [OK] key > [Yes] Account. Report is printed. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of printers is administered. If count by paper size is being performed, then the report will be printed per size.
529
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
1 Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [Login]
NOTE · If you entered a wrong character, select [Clear] key and enter the account ID again. · If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and login will
fail. Enter the correct account ID. · By selecting [Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages
scanned. If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears instead of the screen to enter the account ID. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 484)
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
530
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Logout
1 When the operation is complete, select the [Logout] key. Return to the Enter Account ID screen.
531
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The action is as follows:
Item [Immediately]
[Subsequently] [Alert Only]
Description
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. If sending or storing in the box is already underway, prohibition will become effective from the next job.
The print or scan job currently underway will continue but the subsequent job will be rejected.
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Default Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Apply Limit] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select, [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only] > key [OK]
532
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Copier/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 517) Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 527) Print Accounting Report (page 529)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Job Account.Set.] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Default Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Copy/Print Count] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 Select [Total] or [Individual].
533
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Unknown User Settings
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Unknown User] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Unknown ID Job] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings Select [Reject] or [Permit]. [Permit] The job is permitted to be printed. [Reject] The job is rejected (not printed).
534
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
NOTE This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit]. Unknown ID Job (page 534)
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [User/Job Account] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Unknown User] > [OK] key [ ] [ ] keys > [User Property] > [OK] key
2 Enter the user information. Select [Edit] or [Change], [Detail], enter each detail, then select [OK] key. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. [User Name] Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). [Furigana] [Account Name] Register an account ID for a user whose ID is unknown. [Authoriz. Rules] Set usage authority. The following restriction items are available: [Print Restrict.] Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from PC
535
Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
Regular Maintenance..............................................................................................................537 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................548 Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 736 Clearing Paper Jams ................................................................................................................738
536
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
537
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Platen
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
538
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Slit Glass
When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth. IMPORTANT
Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning. NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
NOTE Cleaning in the Document Processor is only on models supported by duplex scanning function.
539
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Clean the inside of the main unit
To maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned when the toner container is replaced and when vertical streaks appear.
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove the toner container and developer unit
IMPORTANT Do not touch the developing roller or subject it to impact. Print quality will deteriorate.
540
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
3 Place the toner container and developer unit on a level, clean surface.
IMPORTANT Do not place the toner container and developer unit upright.
4 Remove the drum unit
IMPORTANT Do not touch the drum part or subject it to impact. Also, if exposed to direct sunlight or strong light, print quality will deteriorate.
5 Place the removed drum unit on a level, clean surface.
IMPORTANT Do not stand the drum unit upright.
541
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
6 Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe off any paper dust or dirt from the metal resist rollers.
7 Slide the charger cleaner knob on the upper side of the drum unit left and right 2 or 3 times.
IMPORTANT When cleaning the charger wire for the first time, remove the tape that secures the charger cleaner knob. After cleaning, return the charger cleaner knob to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION)
8 Return the drum unit
9 Return the toner container and drum unit
542
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
10 Close the top cover.
543
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Container
When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed. Replace the toner container.
"Toner is empty."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for replacement.
"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"
The number of pages that can be printed with one toner container depends on the print data (how much toner is used). Compliant with JIS X 6932 (ISO/IEC 19798), when the EcoPrint mode is turned [Off], the average number of printable pages of the toner container is as follows: (When printing with A4.)
Model name
Toner container name
Toner yield (number of prints)
ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x
ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x
TK-1270 TK-1275/TK-1277*1
10,000 pages 3,000 pages
The average number of printable sheets of the toner container that comes with this machine is in the table below.
Model
ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x
ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x
3,600 sheets
Toner container yield (number of prints)
1,000 sheets
NOTE
· For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may cause image defects and product failure.
· The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
544
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
1 Open the top cover.
2 unlock 3 Remove the toner container. 4 Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.
545
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
5 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the points shown below.
6 Shake the toner container. 7 Install the toner container.
546
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
8 Close the top cover.
IMPORTANT · If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly. · Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
547
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If the problem persists, contact your service representative.
NOTE When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following: Preface (page 2)
548
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Machine Operation Trouble
The application does not start up
Is the auto panel reset setting time set too short? Check the set time for auto panel reset.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Timer Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [PanelReset Timer] > [OK] key
2 Set the panel reset time to 30 seconds or more It can be set in the range of 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments).
549
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The screen does not respond when the power switch is turned on
Is the machine plugged in?
1 Plug in the power cord that comes with this machine to an outlet. Make sure the power plug is securely plugged in.
550
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Machine does not print even when [Start] is pressed
Is there a message displayed on the screen? If a message is displayed on the screen, you may not be able to operate it depending on what is displayed. Determine the appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly. Is the machine in Sleep mode? Operation can't be done when it is in sleep mode.
1 Press the [Energy Saver] key.
551
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Blank sheets are ejected
Is the original set correctly? Placing Originals on the Platen
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Size (page 284)
552
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Placing Originals in the Document Processor
1 Open the document tray and adjust the document width guide to the document size.
2 Load paper.
1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up.
NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Orig.Orientation (page 289)
IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
553
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam. Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed with the punched holes or perforated lines on the right side (so that they will be scanned last). 2 Open the original stopper. (If the original size is Folio/Legal)
Is the application software set correctly? Check the settings of the application software.
554
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Paper often jams
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE If the baseplate is rising, push the baseplate until it locks.
555
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
IMPORTANT When using Folio, Oficio II, or Legal
2 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
556
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing down. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the
cassettes. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator. · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
557
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the cassette back in.
IMPORTANT Push all cassettes all the way in. If they are not pushed all the way in, they may cause a jam.
NOTE There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette. The display changes up and down to match the remaining amount of paper.
Remove the paper from the cassette once if there is no improvement, turn it over and reload it, or change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
558
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in
559
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
· If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
· Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
· Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Vertical envelope (open opening) · Horizontal envelope (close opening)
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MF Tray Set.] (page 433)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 138) 560
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition? Remove the paper from the cassette, turn it over, and then reload it. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine? Remove the jammed paper. Clearing Paper Jams (page 738)
561
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Two or more sheets are overlaps when ejected (multi feeding)
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE If the baseplate is rising, push the baseplate until it locks.
562
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
IMPORTANT When using Folio, Oficio II, or Legal
2 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
563
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing down. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the
cassettes. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator. · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
564
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the cassette back in.
IMPORTANT Push all cassettes all the way in. If they are not pushed all the way in, they may cause a jam.
NOTE There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette. The display changes up and down to match the remaining amount of paper.
Remove the paper from the cassette once if there is no improvement, turn it over and reload it, or change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
565
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in
566
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
· If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
· Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
· Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Vertical envelope (open opening) · Horizontal envelope (close opening)
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MF Tray Set.] (page 433)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 138) 567
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
568
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printouts are wrinkled
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE If the baseplate is rising, push the baseplate until it locks.
569
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
IMPORTANT When using Folio, Oficio II, or Legal
2 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
570
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing down. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the
cassettes. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator. · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
571
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the cassette back in.
IMPORTANT Push all cassettes all the way in. If they are not pushed all the way in, they may cause a jam.
NOTE There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette. The display changes up and down to match the remaining amount of paper.
Remove the paper from the cassette once if there is no improvement, turn it over and reload it, or change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
572
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in
573
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
· If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
· Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
· Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Vertical envelope (open opening) · Horizontal envelope (close opening)
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MF Tray Set.] (page 433)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 138) 574
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
575
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printouts are curled
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
NOTE If the baseplate is rising, push the baseplate until it locks.
576
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
IMPORTANT When using Folio, Oficio II, or Legal
2 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
577
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing down. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the
cassettes. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator. · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.
578
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the cassette back in.
IMPORTANT Push all cassettes all the way in. If they are not pushed all the way in, they may cause a jam.
NOTE There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front of the cassette. The display changes up and down to match the remaining amount of paper.
Remove the paper from the cassette once if there is no improvement, turn it over and reload it, or change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
579
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 129)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in
580
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
· If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
· Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
· Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Vertical envelope (open opening) · Horizontal envelope (close opening)
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MF Tray Set.] (page 433)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 138) 581
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
582
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printer driver cannot be installed
Is the driver installed with the host name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct function is available? Specify the IP address instead of the host name. Installing Software (page 84) Is Level 3 selected in Security Quick Setup?
1 Acquire a root certificate for SSL communication from a trusted root certification authority. In Command Center RX, click [Security Settings] > [Certificates], and register the root certificate in [Root Certificate 1] to [Root Certificate 5].
2 After installing the certificate, restart the PC. 3 In Command Center RX, click [Network Settings] > [Protocols], and in [Other
Protocols], set "SNMPv3" to [On].
4 In Command Center RX, click [Management Settings] > [SNMP], and set "SNMPv3". 5 Access [Control Panel], and click [Devices and Printers], [Add a printer], [The printer
that I want isn't listed].
6 Check [Select a shared printer by name] and enter the address of the printer. E.g.: https://hostname:443/printers/lp1
7 Select the desired printer and specify the printer driver.
583
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot start printing
Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Is the power turned on? Turn the power switch on.
1 Turn the power switch on.
IMPORTANT Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch. Are the USB cable and network cable connected? Make sure to connect the USB cable and network cable securely.
584
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Connect the network cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 53)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network. Network Setup (page 66)
585
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Connect a USB cable to the machine.
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 53)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2 Power on the machine.
Is the print job paused? Resume printing.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Pause]. Printing is paused. When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume]. NOTE Selecting a function key such as the [Back] key or the [Copy] key while the job is paused will [Resume paused jobs. Are you sure? ] is displayed. Select [Yes] and select the [OK] key to restart the job and display the following screen. If you select [No] and select the [OK] key, the job remains paused and the following screen appears.
586
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Are there a mixture of inaccessible addresses? If you have configured wired and Wi-Fi networks with name resolution, you may have a mix of IP addresses (private addresses) on the other inaccessible network.
IMPORTANT Only one host name and one domain name can be used on this machine. Please consider this limitation when setting the network operation.
1 [System Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Primary Network] > [OK] key Select Wi-Fi or Wired as the network to use without restrictions. [Primary Network] (page 402)
2 [System Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ProtocolSettings] > [OK] key Please [Enable] either [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi] and [Disable] the other. [ProtocolSettings] (page 392)
3 In Command Center RX, change the settings for name resolution of NetBEUI, DNS, etc., or change the network environment settings. Command Center RX User Guide
587
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot print with USB drive / Does not recognize USB drive
Is the USB drive connected to the machine firmly? Connect the USB drive firmly to the machine. Are USB host settings set to [Block]?
1 Change the USB host setting to [Unblock] [System Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [I/F Block Set.] > [OK] key [I/F Block Set.] (page 403) Is the USB drive broken? Use another USB drive.
588
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
While [Auto-IP] is already set to [On], the IP address is not assigned automatically
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered for the link local address of TCP/IP(v4)?
1 Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address of TCP/IP(v4).
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] key > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] key > [Wired Netwk. Set] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [TCP/IP Settings] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [IPv4 Setting] > [OK] key
2 Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. TCP/IP (IPv4) setting (page 66)
589
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot send via SMB
Is the network cable connected? Connect the cable to the Machine and HUB securely.
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
Are the network settings on the machine configured correctly? Check that TCP/IP is [On], and IPv4 or IPv6 is configured in accordance with the usage environment. [TCP/IP Settings] (page 383) Is SMB protocol configured?
1 Set the SMB protocol settings to On. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ProtocolSettings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [SMB] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
Are the host name, folder path, login user name, and login password of the destination computer correct?
1 Select the [Send] key 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [SMB] > [OK] key
590
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Enter the destination details. Enter each item and select the [OK] key.
NOTE
When selecting On for "Check New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 255)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item Host NameHost Name
Path
Login User Name
Description
Computer name Enter "Host Name" or "IP Address". To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ]. Limited character count: 256 characters or less Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10] (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
Share name Limited character count: 260 characters or less For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder
· If the computer name and domain name are the same User Name For example: james.smith.
· If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Limited character count: 64 characters or less
NOTE
When transmitting using the wireless network, only alphanumeric characters are allowed. Also, if the computer name and domain name are different because "\" is not available, use @ to enter the user name in the following format:
User name@Domain name
(Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
Login Password
Logon password. Limited character count: 128 characters or less Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
A host name can also specify a port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name:Port number" or "IP Address:Port number". To enter an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ].
591
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445) The default port number is 445 if not specified.
Are the folder sharing settings configured correctly? Check the sharing settings and access permissions in the folder properties.
1 Right-click the shared folder and click [Properties] [Security], in that order. 2 Select a user and make sure the user you entered in the group name or user name
field is displayed
3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on the [Allows] checkbox for "Modify" and "Read & Execute".
4 Click the [Close] button. Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name (page 143)
Is the selected interface selected as the Primary Network? Make sure the selected interface is selected as the Primary Network.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Primary Network] > [OK] key >
2 Specify the host name or IP address of the interface selected as the Primary Network, or reconfigure it to the interface you want to use. For example, if you selected Wi-Fi as your preferred network, specify the host name or IP address of your wireless network.
Are the exception settings for Windows Firewall configured correctly? Make sure that the exception settings for Windows Firewall are configures correctly.
1 Select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [System and Security] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall]from the desktop charm, in that order.
2 Make sure that checkmarks appear on the checkbox for [File and Printer Sharing] 3 Return to screen [System and Security] and select [Check Firewall Status] for
Windows Defender Firewall.
4 Click [Advanced Setting] [Inbound Rules], in that order. 5 Confirm that the registered exception settings (rules) are displayed in the list.
Configuring Windows Firewall (page 148)
Are the time settings of the machine, domain server, and data destination PC all synchronized? Synchronize the time settings of the machine domain server, and the data destination PC.
592
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is "Send error." displayed on the screen? For details, refer to the following: "Send error. " is displayed (page 661)
593
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot send via email
Is the email send size limited in the SMTP server registered in this machine? Check email sending size in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Check whether a restriction value is entered in [E-mail Size Limit] of "E-mail Send
Settings", and change it as necessary.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
594
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The machine is emitting steam in the area around the paper ejection slot
Is the temperature in the room where the machine is running low? Or was damp paper used? Depending on the machine's printing environment and the condition of the paper, the moist contained in the paper may evaporate due to the heat generated during printing, and the water vapor emitted may look like smoke. There is no problem, and you can continue printing. If the steam concerns you, raise the room temperature or replace the paper with a new dryer paper.
595
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Even after replacing the toner container, the message to replace the toner container does not disappear
Corrective Actions Make sure the rear cover, and other covers are closed.
596
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot find the machine with WSD
Are you searching for this machine by specifying the IP address or host name? For security reasons, protocol is set to off, and therefore you cannot search by IP address or host name.
597
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed Image Trouble
Printouts are totally too light
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
Is the media type set correctly? Check if the media type setting is correct.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Cassette 1 Set.] - [Cassette 3 Set.]> [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Cassette 1 Type] - [Cassette 3 Type]> [OK] key
2 Check the weight (paper thickness) for the paper type and change it to the correct value
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level.
1 Set the concentration in the range of[-4] to [+4] Density (page 292) NOTE To print with the same density all the time, select from the [Adjust/Maint.] [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] key > [Copy Denst. Adj.] or [Print Density] > [OK] key Copy Denst. Adj. (page 475) [Copy Denst. Adj.] (page 475)
598
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Have you set EcoPrint? Set to [Off].
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Printer] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [EcoPrint] > [OK] key
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Off] > [OK] key
Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Drum Refresh] > [OK] key > [Yes] Drum Refresh begins. Are the developer unit and drum unit installed properly?
1 Install the developing unit and drum unit correctly. Clean the inside of the main unit (page 540)
599
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
White background parts of the image appear to have a slight overall grey coloration
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level.
1 Set the concentration in the range of[-4] to [+4] Density (page 292) NOTE To print with the same density all the time, select from the [Adjust/Maint.] [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Copy Denst. Adj.] > [OK] key [Print Density] (page 476) [Copy Denst. Adj.] (page 475)
Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key > [ ][ ] keys > [Drum Refresh] > [OK] key.
2 Run [Drum Refresh]
1 Select [Yes]. [Drum Refresh] begins.
600
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Increase the value of MC.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Select a value larger than the current value by selecting [ ] [ ] keys > [MC] > [OK] > [ ] [ ] key.
3 Print and check the image quality Increase the setting value until it improves. NOTE If no improvement is seen, return to the original settings.
601
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly)
Is it an original with a photo printed on it? Check the content structure of the original and change it to an appropriate image quality.
1 Select a [Original Image] for each function 2 Select [Photo].
Original Image (page 293) Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
1 Select a [Sharpness] for each function 2 Set in the range of [-1] to [-3]
Set [DP Read Action] to [Quality Priority].
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Copy] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [DP Read Action] > [OK] key
2 Configure the settings
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Quality Priority] > [OK] key
602
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Texts are not clearly printed
Have you selected appropriate image quality for the original? Check the content structure of the original and change it to an appropriate image quality.
1 Select a [Original Image] for each function 2 Select the image quality that matches the type of the original
Original Image (page 293) Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
1 Select a [Sharpness] for each function 2 Set in the range of [-1] to [-3]
603
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Black dots appear on the white background
Is the original holder or the platen dirty? Wipe the inside of the document processor and the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
NOTE Cleaning in the Document Processor is only on models supported by duplex scanning function.
604
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Drum Refresh] > [Yes] Drum Refresh begins. Increase the value of MC.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Select a value larger than the current value by selecting [ ] [ ] keys > [MC] > [OK] > [ ] [ ] key.
3 Print and check the image quality Increase the setting value until it improves. NOTE If there is no improvement, return to the original settings.
605
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images are fuzzy or cut off
Are you using the machine in a place with high humidity or drastic temperature and humidity fluctuations? Use the machine in an environment with appropriate humidity. Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Drum Refresh] > [Yes] Drum Refresh begins.
606
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images are shifted
Is the original set correctly? · When setting the original on the platen, make sure to align the original with the original size indicator plate.
Placing Originals on the Platen (page 219) · When loading the original in the document processor, make sure to align the original width guides before
loading the original. Loading Originals in the document processor (page 221) Is the paper loaded correctly? Adjust the paper length guide and width guide of the cassette to fit the paper size. Loading in the Cassettes (page 131)
607
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Irregular horizontal lines appear in the image
MC needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 [Menu] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [MC] > [OK] key
2 Execute
1 Select [Yes]. Increase the setting value. When making adjustments, increase the current value by one level at a time. If the effect does not appear even after increasing the setting by one level, increase the setting by one more level. If the effect does not appear, reduce the original value by one level at a time. If the effect does not appear even after reducing the value by one level, try reducing the value by one more level. If the effect still does not appear, please change the value back to its original value.
608
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The usage environment is at a high altitude of 1000m or higher, and irregular horizontal white lines appear on the image.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Altitude Adj.] > [OK] key and set the altitude one level higher than the current setting.
609
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The usage environment is at a high altitude of 1000m or higher, and black dots appear in the image.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Altitude Adj.] > [OK] key and set the altitude one level higher than the current setting.
610
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images have vertical lines
Is the slit glass dirty? When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.
IMPORTANT Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE Cleaning in the Document Processor is only on models supported by duplex scanning function.
611
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Clean the charger inside the main unit.
1 Open the Front cover.
2 Remove Developer unit.
NOTE Do not touch the developing roller or subject it to impact. Print quality will deteriorate.
3 Place the removed Developer unit on a clean, level surface.
NOTE Do not stand the Developer unit upright.
612
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Remove Drum unit.
NOTE Do not touch the drum part or subject it to impact. Also, if exposed to direct sunlight or strong light, print quality will deteriorate.
5 Place the removed Drum unit on a clean, level surface.
NOTE Do not stand the Drum unit upright.
6 Wipe away the paper dust and dirt on Registration roller (metal) using a soft, dry cloth.
613
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
7 Slide the upper charger cleaner knob of the Drum unit to the left and right two or three times.
NOTE · When cleaning the charger wire for the first time, remove the tape that secures the charger cleaner
knob. · After cleaning, return the charger cleaner knob to its original position.
8 Return the Drum unit.
9 Return the Developer unit.
10 Close the Front cover.
614
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Dirt on the top edge or back of the paper
Is the inside of the machine dirty? To maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned when the toner container is replaced and when vertical streaks appear.
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove Developer unit.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the developing roller or subject it to impact. Print quality will deteriorate.
615
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Place the removed Developer unit on a clean, level surface.
NOTE Do not stand the Developer unit upright.
4 Remove Drum unit
NOTE Do not touch the drum part or subject it to impact. Also, if exposed to direct sunlight or strong light, print quality will deteriorate.
5 Place the removed Drum unit on a clean, level surface.
NOTE Do not stand the Drum unit upright.
616
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
6 Wipe away the paper dust and dirt on Registration roller (metal) using a soft, dry cloth.
7 Slide the upper charger cleaner knob of the Drum unit to the left and right two or three times.
NOTE · When cleaning the charger wire for the first time, remove the tape that secures the charger cleaner
knob. · After cleaning, return the charger cleaner knob to its original position (CLEANER HOME POSITION)
8 Return the Drum unit.
9 Return the Developer unit.
617
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
10 Close the top cover.
618
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Part of the image is periodically faint or shows white lines
Is the Front Cover tightly closed? Open the Front Cover and close it again.
Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [Yes]
Lower the MC value.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Select a value larger than the current value by selecting [ ] [ ] keys > [MC] > [OK] > [ ] [ ] keys.
3 Print and check the image quality Increase the value until it improves. NOTE If no improvement is seen, return to the original value.
619
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
A lighter version of the previous image remains and is repeatedly printed
Is the media type set correctly? Check if the media type setting is correct.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Orig./Paper Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Cassette 1 Set.] - [Cassette 3 Set.]> [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Cassette 1 Type] - [Cassette 3 Type]> [OK] key
2 Check the weight (paper thickness) for the paper type and change it to the correct value Increase the value of MC.
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Select a value larger than the current value by selecting [ ] [ ] keys > [MC] > [OK] > [ ] [ ] key.
3 Print and check the image quality Increase the setting value until it improves. NOTE If no improvement is seen, return to the original settings.
620
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The print on the back page bleeds through
1 [Function Menu] > [Prevent Bleed-thru] > [ ] [ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
NOTE You can also set the anti-reflection function in the following steps. [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Function Default] > [OK] key > [ ] key >
621
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Remote Operation
This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.
Executing Remote Operation from Browser
The supported Browser is as follows. We recommend the latest version of browser to use Remote Operation. · Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later) · Microsoft Edge · Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later) · Safari (Version 5.0 or later) This section describes the procedure for performing remote operations from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.
NOTE To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [ProtocolSettings] > [OK] key
2 Set [EnhancdVNC ov TLS] [ProtocolSettings] (page 392) NOTE You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
622
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Configure settings for remote operation.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Remote Operation] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Remote Ope. Set.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Use Restriction] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Off], select [Use Password] or [Admin. Only] > [OK] key When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm Password", then select [OK]. [Remote Operation] (page 413)
NOTE You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
4 Restart the machine. [Restart] (page 407)
5 Start up the browser. Specify https: // [Host name of this Machine] and start Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
6 [Device Information / Remote Operation] > [Remote Operation] 7 Click [Start].
NOTE · If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed on the
operation panel. Select [Yes]. · If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation, select Always
allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click [Completed]. Perform [Start] after waiting 1 minute or more.
When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the system administrator's or user's PC screen.
623
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Executing Remote Operation from VNC Software
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Network Setting] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys [ProtocolSettings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ]keys [VNC (RFB)] > [OK] key
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [On] > [OK] key
NOTE · If "VNC (RFB) over TLS" is set to On, the communication is encrypted. · You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
3 Startup the remote operation.
1 Start up the VNC software. 2 Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.
"IP address: port number" NOTE
When setting "VNC (RFB)" to On in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When "VNC (RFB) over TLS" is set to On, the default port number is 9063. [ProtocolSettings] (page 392)
624
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following: Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 2)
"Access point was not detected. " is displayed
Check if the access point has been set correctly.
625
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Load paper in cassette #." is displayed.
Has the paper run out in the displayed paper source? Replenish the paper. Loading in the Cassettes (page 131) To print with paper from another paper source, select [Paper]. Select the paper source from [Paper Selection] and then select the [OK] key. Select [OK] key to print without changing the paper source.
626
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Load paper in MP tray." is displayed.
Does the paper source paper size setting not match the actual paper size that is fed? There is no paper in the multipurpose tray that matches the print data. Set the paper. Select [OK] to resume printing. To print with paper from another paper source, select [Paper]. Select the paper source from [Paper Selection] and then select the [OK] key. Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
627
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Box limit exceeded. Job is canceled. " is displayed
Jobs cannot be saved because the specified box is full. The job is canceled. Print or delete the original in the box, and then try again.
628
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Broadcast error Job is canceled. " is displayed
An error occurred while broadcasting. The job is canceled. Select [OK] key.
629
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect to authentication server Contact the administrator." is displayed
Does the machine time match the server's time? · Set the machine time to match the server's time
Setting Date and Time (page 64)
Is it properly registered with the authentication server? · Enable User Login Administration.
Enable User Login Administration (page 481) · Set the network authentication server.
· Check the connection status with the server. · Confirm that the computer name and password for the authentication server are correct.
Is the machine connected to the network correctly? Connecting LAN Cable (page 49) Network Setup (page 66)
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
630
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect to the server." is displayed
Check the connection status with the server.
631
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect. " is displayed
Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct connection could not be completed. Select [OK]. Returns to the previous screen. Check the settings and signal conditions. [Wi-Fi Direct Set] (page 375) [Wi-Fi Settings] (page 377)
632
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot duplex print on this paper." is displayed
Have you selected a size or type of paper that cannot be duplex printed? To print on paper from another paper source, select [Paper]. Select the paper source from [Paper Selection] and then select the [OK] key. Select [OK] key to cancel duplex printing and continue printing. Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
633
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Print overrun" is displayed
The job was paused because print processing is taking a long time. Select [Continue] to restart the job. To cancel the job, select [Cancel].
634
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot perform remote printing. Job is canceled." is displayed
Remote printing is prohibited. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
635
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Printing multiple copies is not allowed." is displayed.
Only one copy is available. · Select [Continue] to continue printing. · Select [Canceled] to cancel the job.
636
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot use this function. Restricted by authorization settings." is displayed.
Restricted by the authorization settings. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
637
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print." is displayed.
Restricted by the job accounting. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
638
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"This user account has been locked out. You cannot login." is displayed.
Please contact the administrator. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
639
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot use this function." is displayed.
This job will be aborted because user authorization prohibits that function. Select [OK].
640
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot read data in this ID Card. " is displayed
In registration process, the ID card information was not read correctly. Hold the ID card over the ID card reader again. If the same message is displayed again, the ID card may not be compatible with this product. Replace it with another ID card.
641
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot recognize the ID card reader." is displayed.
· Check if the USB connector of your ID card reader is correctly connected to the main unit. · If [USB Host] in [I/F Block Set.] is set to [Block], change it to [Unblock].
642
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to activate. Contact administrator." is displayed.
Failed to activate the application. Please contact the administrator. Extended authentication is disabled. Turn the power switch off and then on again. If the error persists, contact administrator.
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed. It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT · If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power
switch disables fax transmission and reception. · Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
643
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to send via SMB." is displayed.
Are this machine and the scanned image destination PC connected to the network? Check the network. · Connecting LAN Cable · Hub behavior · The server status · Host name or IP address · Port number Connecting LAN Cable (page 49) Network Setup (page 66) [Network Setting] (page 373)
Is the account information (user ID, password) used to access the shared folder to which the scanned image is to be sent incorrect? Check the settings of the scanned image destination PC. · Host Name · Path · Login user name
NOTE If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. [Login User name]@[Domain name] Example) sa720XXXX@km · Login Password · Folder share permissions of the recipient
644
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to store job retention data. Job is canceled. " is displayed
The job is canceled. Select [OK].
645
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Account error." is displayed.
Failed to specify Job Accounting when processing the job externally. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
646
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Incorrect account ID. " is displayed
The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
647
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Job Accounting restriction exceeded. " is displayed
Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded? The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print any more. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
648
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"KPDL error. Job is canceled. " is displayed
PostScript error has occurred. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
649
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Error occurred. Turn the power switch off and on." is displayed
error has occurred. Turn the power Off/On. It the problem is not solved, make a note of the error code displayed on the screen and contact service representative.
650
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Machine failure. Call service. " is displayed
Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the screen and contact service representative.
651
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maximum Number of scanned pages. Job is canceled." is displayed
Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded? Cannot scan pages any more. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
652
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Memory is full. Job is canceled. " is displayed
The memory is full and the job cannot be continued. Select [OK]. This job is [Cancel]. When insufficient memory occurred frequently, contact your dealer or service representative.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
653
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Paper jammed in ###." is displayed
A paper jam has occurred. If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the screen. Leave the machine on and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper. Jam Location Indicators (page 738)
654
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Refreshing drum... Please wait." is displayed
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain quality. Please wait.
655
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Regulating the temp.." is displayed.
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain quality. Please wait.
656
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Remove original from document processor." is displayed.
Are there any originals left in the document processor? Remove the original from the document processor.
IMPORTANT If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the top cover and remove the jammed paper.
657
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Remove the original from the document processor. 4 Return the cover to the original position.
658
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Scanner memory is full. Job is canceled." is displayed
Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of the scanner. The job is canceled. Select [OK].
659
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Scheduled sending jobs exceeded. Job is canceled." is displayed
The number of timer transmissions that can be set has been exceeded. Select [OK]. The job is canceled. Wait until the delayed transmission is executed, or cancel the delayed transmission and then perform the job again.
660
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Send error. " is displayed
An error has occurred during sending. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. Refer to the transmission error code list for the error code and its details. List of Transmission Error Codes (page 682)
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
661
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The device cannot be connected because allowed connections would be exceeded." is displayed
Are you connecting more than the maximum number of Wi-Fi Direct connections? Disconnect the devices that you are not using, or set the [Disconnect Timer] of this unit to disconnect the devices. [Wi-Fi Direct Set] (page 375)
662
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The password does not meet password policy requirements. Job is canceled." is displayed.
Has your password expired? Change the login password. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. Password Policy Settings (page 483) Change the user properties (page 488) Have your password policy requirements changed (password length, strings of characters to use, etc.)? Check your password policy requirements and change the login password. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. Password Policy Settings (page 483) Change the user properties (page 488)
663
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"MaliciousPRG detected Delete the program. Contact the admin." is displayed.
Execution was aborted due to a possible malware program. The names of applications for which malware has been detected are displayed. Please contact the administrator.
664
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"RAM disk error. Press [OK]. " is displayed
A RAM disk error has occurred. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. The following error code is possible: 04: There is not enough free space on the RAM disk. If the optional RAM disk is installed, increase the RAM disk size by using [RAM Disk Mode] in the System Menu. RAM Disk Mode (page 450)
665
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"TMaintenance Kit near end." is displayed.
Contact your service representative The maintenance kit needs to be replaced. The maintenance kit needs to be replaced at every 100,000 pages of printing.
666
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The slit glass requires cleaning." is displayed.
The slit glass requires cleaning. When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth. When cleaning is finished, select [OK].
IMPORTANT Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
NOTE Cleaning in the Document Processor is only on models supported by duplex scanning function.
667
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Replace the toner." is displayed.
Replace the toner container to our specified toner container.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Here, we'll explain the procedures for replacing the toner container.
1 Open the top cover.
2 unlock
3 Remove the toner container.
668
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Put the toner container into the toner container collection bag. 5 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the points shown below.
6 Shake the toner container 5 to 6 times.
669
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
7 Install the toner container.
8 Close the top cover.
NOTE · If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly. · Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
670
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Toner is low.""(Replace when empty.)" is displayed.
It is almost time to replace the toner container. Obtain a new toner container.
671
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Non-genuine Toner. Press [Help]." is displayed.
Does the type of toner you have match the model? Select [Help] and follow the instructions on the screen.
672
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Unknown toner installed." is displayed.
Does the sales region of the toner you have match the sales region of the main body? Use the toner that matches the sales region of the main body.
673
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The toner container is improperly installed." is displayed.
Are the toner container and developer unit installed properly? The toner cartridge is not installed properly. Clean the inside of the main unit (page 540)
674
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"USB Drive error. Job is canceled. " is displayed
Is the USB drive write-protected? An error occurred in the USB drive. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. The following error code is displayed: 01: Connect a writeable USB drive. An error occurred in the USB drive. The job is canceled. Select [OK]. The following error code is displayed: 01: The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded. Restart the system or turn the power OFF/ON. If the error still occurs, divide the file into smaller files. If the error persists, the USB drive is not compatible with the machine. Use the USB drive formatted by this machine. If the USB drive cannot be formatted, it is damaged. Connect a compatible USB drive.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
675
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"USB Drive is full. Job is canceled." is displayed
There is not enough free space on the USB drive. The job is canceled. Delete unnecessary files on the USB drive.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: [Error Handling] (page 438)
676
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Memory card error. Job is canceled." is displayed.
An error has occurred on the memory card. An error has occurred on the memory card. The job is canceled. Select . 04: There is not enough free space on the memory card. Move data or delete unneeded data.
677
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"High temperature.""Adjust room temp." is displayed.
Print quality may be deteriorated. Adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room.
678
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Low temperature.""Adjust room temp." is displayed
Print quality may be deteriorated. Adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room.
679
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Insufficient memory. Cannot start the job." is displayed.
Cannot start the job. Try again later.
680
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"You cannot use this box. Job is canceled." is displayed
This job will be aborted because user authorization prohibits that function. Select [OK].
681
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
List of Transmission Error Codes
1101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the host name of the SMTP server with Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Enter the host name of the SMTP server in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Check the [SMTP Server Name] in "SMTP".
Correct anything that is incorrect.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
682
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1101 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check your SMB settings. >Login user name or login password Reference: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. >Host name >Path The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the host name of the destination computer.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer is correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 234)
NOTE If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer is correct.
NOTE If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
683
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the FTP "Host name" or "IP address". The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the host name of the FTP.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the FTP server is correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 236) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) to check> [OK] key 3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the FTP server is correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
684
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the followings on the Command Center RX > SMTP login user name and login password > POP3 login user name and login password 1102 Corrective Action Check the login user name and password for the SMTP server and POP3 server.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Check whether the login user name and password for the SMTP server have
been entered in [Authentication Protocol] of "SMTP", and change the settings as necessary.
6 Click [Settings] in "POP3 User Settings" 7 Check whether the login user name and password have been entered and change
the settings as necessary.
8 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
685
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check your SMB settings. >Login user name or login password Reference: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. >Host name >Path The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the login user name and password of the destination computer.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer is correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 234)
NOTE
· If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
· If you use a host name, make sure it does not contain the following forbidden characters: ` ~ ! @ # $ ^ & * ( ) = + [ ] { } \ | ; : ' " < > / ?
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer are correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it.
NOTE
· If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
· If you use a host name, make sure it does not contain the following forbidden characters: ` ~ ! @ # $ ^ & * ( ) = + [ ] { } \ | ; : ' " < > / ?
686
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting 4 [OK] key > [Yes] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
687
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check your FTP settings. >Login user name or login password Reference: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the login user name and password for the FTP.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the FTP server is correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 236)
NOTE
· If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the FTP are correct.
NOTE
· If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
688
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1103 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check your SMB settings. >Login user name or login password Reference: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. > Path > Folder share permissions of the recipient The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path are correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 234)
NOTE
If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer are correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it.
NOTE
If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
4 [OK] key > [Yes] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
689
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Make sure the folder sharing settings are configured correctly Check the sharing settings and access permissions in the folder properties. 1 Right-click the shared folder and click [Properties] [Security], in that order. 2 Select a user and make sure the user you entered in the group name or user name field is displayed 3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on the [Allow] checkbox for "Modify" and "Read & execute". 4 Click the [OK] button. Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name (page 143)
690
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1103 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. > Login user name and login password 1103 Corrective Action Check the destination folder path.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path are correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 236)
NOTE If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Make sure that the destination folder path is correct.
NOTE If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
691
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1104 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the Email Address. Reference You cannot send it if it is denied by domain restriction. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the Email Address.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the email address is correct. Sending Document via E-mail (page 233) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key 3 Check the Email Address
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [OK] key > [Yes]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167) If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Make sure your email address is not rejected due to domain restrictions
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Click [Domain List] in "SMTP"
The SMTP domain restriction list is displayed. 6 If the email address you use is included in the list, delete it. 7 Click [Submit] twice.
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
692
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Turn SMTP [On] in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action From Command Center RX, check that SMTP (email sending) is On.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Network Settings] in the [Protocols] menu 5 Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
693
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Turn SMB [On] in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Make sure the protocol is set correctly.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Network Settings] in the [Protocols] menu 5 Set "SMB" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
694
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Turn FTP [On] in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Make sure the protocol is set correctly.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Network Settings] in the [Protocols] menu 5 Set "FTP Client (Transmission)" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
695
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1106 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the sender address on the SMTP in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the sender address on the SMTP server from Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Set the [Sender Address] in "E-mail Send Settings".
Please specify an email address that can be received by the Machine Administrator. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256 characters.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
696
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1131 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Turn the secure protocol TLS [On] in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Please set to allow the use of TLS.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Security Settings] in the [Network Security] menu 5 Set [TLS] to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
Command Center RX User Guide
697
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1132 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the destination server. > Supports FTPS >Supports the encryption method you have set The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the destination server.
1 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS) If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Make sure the destination server supports the encryption method you have set.
698
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the Command Center RX and network settings. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status > POP3 server name for POP3 user > SMTP server name The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check Command Center RX and network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Check the host name of the SMTP server in Command Center RX.
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Check the "SMTP" [SMTP Server Name].
Correct anything that is incorrect. 6 Click [Submit].
If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
699
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
5 Check the users in POP before SMTP authentication in Command Center RX. Set this when using POP before SMTP as SMTP authentication. 1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Select "Authentication Protocol" 6 Check that [Other] is not selected from "Authenticate as" If this is not the case, select a valid POP3 user other than [Other]. 7 Click [Submit] twice. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
6 Check the POP3 server name for POP3 users in Command Center RX
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Click "POP3 User Settings"
The "POP3 User Settings" screen is displayed. 6 Check the [POP3 Server Name] in "User 2".
Correct anything that is incorrect. 7 Click [Submit] twice.
700
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check your network and SMB settings. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status > Host name or IP address > Port number The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action
Check your network and SMB settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 234) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
5 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key
3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. If it is incorrect, correct it.
4 [Register] > [OK] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
701
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check your network and FTP settings. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status > Host name or IP address > Port number The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action
Check your network and FTP settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 236) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
5 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Edit Destination] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Address Book] > [OK] key
2 Select the destinations (Individual) > [OK] key
3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. If it is incorrect, correct it.
4 [OK] key > [Yes] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 167)
702
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2102 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
703
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2102 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the destination server. > Supports FTPS > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS)
704
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2103 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
705
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2103 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS)
706
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
707
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
708
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
709
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2202 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
710
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2202 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
711
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2203 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Unable to send SMB. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
712
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2203 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
713
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2204 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the size restrictions for email sending in the SMTP settings of Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the size restrictions for email sending in the SMTP settings in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Functions] in the [E-mail] menu 5 Check whether a restriction value is entered in [E-mail Size Limit] of "E-mail Send
Settings", and change it as necessary.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 114)
714
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2231 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
715
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the source and destination authentication methods. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the source and destination authentication methods.
1 Check the source and destination authentication methods. Make sure that the settings for using or not using SMTP/POP authentication of the source matches those of the destination.
716
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Unable to send FTP. Check the network. > Connecting the network cables > Hub operation > Server status The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping.
717
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3201 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the destination SMTP user authentication method. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action
1 Check the destination SMTP user authentication method
718
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4801 "Job is canceled. Press [OK]." is displayed
Message The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the message display and contact the service representative.
719
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4802 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send email. Check the encryption certificate for each destination in Command Center RX. The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact the service representative.
720
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4803 "Job is canceled. Press [OK]." is displayed
Message The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Server authentication has expired. Check your network and SMTP settings.
1 Check the date and time of this machine
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Common Settings] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Date Setting] > [OK] key
2 Set year, month, day and seconds If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Make sure the server is using the correct certificate If the server certificate has expired, please renew it.
721
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4804 "Job is canceled. Press [OK]." is displayed
Message The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action When communicating with the mail server using SMTP over TLS, communication cannot be started because the signature algorithm of the server certificate does not match the signature algorithm set on the machine. Please access from Command Center RX to [Security Settings] > [Network Security]. Then, check the value of [Hash] of "Serverside Settings" and [Hash] of [Clientside Settings] and match it with the value on the server side. Restart the machine after setting. Command Center RX User Guide
722
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4901 is displayed
An error occurred while validating the server certificate. Corrective Action Check the SMTP server certificate.
723
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4902 is displayed
Your certificate has expired. Corrective Action Check the SMTP server certificate.
724
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4903 is displayed
An error occurred while validating the X509 certificate. Corrective Action Check the X509 certificate.
725
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4904 is displayed
The certificate has been revoked. Corrective Action Check the SMTP server certificate.
726
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4905 is displayed
An error occurred while setting the encryption / signing certificate. Corrective Action Check the settings related to the certificate and the imported certificate. Command Center RX User Guide
727
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4906 is displayed
Certificate verification did not complete within the set time. Corrective Action · Check the verification environment of the OCSP/CRL certificate and other certificates · Extend the timeout deadline · Change the certificate verification level Command Center RX User Guide
728
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a02 is displayed
Failed to initialize S/MIME. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the message display, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
729
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a03 is displayed
Failed to specify S/MIME encryption. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the message display, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
730
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a04 is displayed
Failed to scan the S/MIME encryption certificate. Corrective Action · Check and correct the settings related to the S/MIME certificate. · Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on
the message display, check the operation description and then contact the service representative. Command Center RX User Guide
731
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a06 is displayed
Failed to specify job accounting S/MIME Signature. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the message display, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
732
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a07 is displayed
Failed to scan the S/MIME signature certificate. Corrective Action · Check and correct the settings related to the S/MIME signature certificate. · Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on
the message display, check the operation description and then contact the service representative. Command Center RX User Guide
733
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a08 is displayed
The sender's email address and the email address on the signature certificate do not match. Corrective Action Check the sender's email address and the email address on the signature certificate, and correct the email address(es).
734
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Other error code "Job is canceled. Press [OK]." is displayed
Message The job is canceled. Press [OK]. Corrective Action Select [OK] and restart the machine.
1 Turn the power switch off and then on again If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the message display and contact the service representative.
735
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/ Maintenance in the system menu. The table below lists the primary items you can carry out.
Item [Drum Refresh][Drum] [Altitude Adj.][Altitude Adj.]
[MC]
Description
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
Set this if irregular horizontal white streaks or black dots appear in images when using the machine at a high altitude of 1000 m or higher. Select the altitude that corresponds to the usage environment. If the problem persists, please select an altitude one step higher than the current setting.
Set this when the following problems occur with images.
· The white part of the image looks entirely gray
· Black dots appear on the white background of the image
· Irregular horizontal lines appear in the image
· Part of the image is periodically faint or shows white lines
· A lighter version of the previous image remains and is repeatedly printed
736
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Perform image adjustment
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Adjust/Maint.] > [OK] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [Service Setting] > [OK] key
2 Execute
1 Select the item to execute. 2 For [Drum Refresh], choose [Yes]. For [Altitude Adj.] or [MC], change the setting and select the [OK] key.
737
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the LCD panel will display and the machine will stop.
Jam Location Indicators
1 Shows the location of a paper jam. 2 Shows the Help screen. The Help screen shows the procedure to clear the jam.
NOTE For the Help screen, refer to the following: Help Screen (page 59) If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location
A
MultipurposeTray
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 740)
B
Cassette 1 to 3
Remove paper jams from Cassette 1 to Cassette 3 (page 741)
738
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location
C
Inside the machine
Remove the paper jammed inside the machine (page 743)
D
Rear Cover and Duplex Unit
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover and Duplex Unit (page 748)
E
Document Processor
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) (page 751)
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
739
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove any jammed paper.
2 Remove all the paper.
3 Reload the paper
740
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove paper jams from Cassette 1 to Cassette 3
The procedure for handling paper jams in cassette 1 to cassette 3 is the same. Cassette 1 is used as an example here.
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Push Cassette 1 back in.
741
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Open the top cover. 5 Close the top cover.
742
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove the paper jammed inside the machine
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Push Cassette 1 back in.
743
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Open the top cover. 5 Remove the toner container and developer unit
IMPORTANT Do not touch the developing roller or subject it to impact. Print quality will deteriorate.
744
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
6 Place the removed toner container and developer unit on a clean, level surface.
IMPORTANT Do not place the toner container and developer unit upright.
7 Take out the drum unit
IMPORTANT
· When removing the drum unit, some parts are very hot. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
· Do not touch the drum part or subject it to impact. Also, if exposed to direct sunlight or strong light, print quality will deteriorate.
8 Place the removed drum unit on a clean, level surface.
IMPORTANT Do not stand the drum unit upright.
745
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
9 Open feed cover C.
10 Remove any jammed paper. 11 Close feed cover C. 12 Return the drum unit
746
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
13 Return the toner container and developer unit 14 Close the top cover.
747
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Rear Cover and Duplex Unit
IMPORTANT Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
1 Open the rear cover.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Open the fixed cover D.
4 Remove any jammed paper.
748
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
5 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops
6 Open the feed cover. 7 Remove any jammed paper. 8 Return the feed cover to the original position.
749
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
9 Push Cassette 1 back in. 10 Return the Rear Cover to the original position. 11 Open the top cover. 12 Close the top cover.
750
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)
IMPORTANT If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the top cover and remove the jammed paper.
751
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3 Remove the original from the document processor. 4 Return the cover to the original position.
752
Appendix
11 Appendix
Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................754 Overview of the Applications .................................................................................................757 Character Entry ........................................................................................................................759 About Paper .............................................................................................................................767 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................781 Backing up your data ..............................................................................................................789 Security Quick Setup Function List ........................................................................................791
753
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Option configuration
The following enhancements are available for this model.
1 Card Authentication Kit(B) AC <Card authentication kit (Activate)> It is possible to make the user authentication with ID card. In order to perform the user authentication with ID card, ID card information has to be registered to the local user list in advance.
2 PF-1100 <Paper Feeder> It is possible to add 2 drawers that is same as the cassette of the main unit. The way of loading paper is same as the standard cassette.
3 UG-50 < Trusted Platform Module> You can secure sensitive information with this option. The encryption key used to encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.
754
Appendix > Optional Equipment 4 SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card
SD/SDHC memory card is the micro-chip card that the option font, macro, form, etc. can be written. Insert SDHC memory card (Max. 32GB) and SD memory card (Max. 2GB) into the memory card slot.
NOTE If removing the TPM chip after the data encryption function is enabled, the machine will stop working. Software option A. UG-33 AC <ThinPrint expansion kit (Activate)> It is possible print the print data directly even without the print driver.
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card
Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or automatically when you power on or reset the machine.
755
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card
To use an unused SD/SDHC Memory Card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SD/SDHC Memory Card.
1 Turn off the power and disconnect the power cord and all cables connected to the unit.
2 Open the cover.
3 Insert SD/SDHC Memory Card into the memory card slot.
4 Attach the removed cover to the main unit.
756
Appendix > Overview of the Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine. · ThinPrint expansion kit (Activate)ThinPrint expansion kit (Activate)
This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time. · Authentication kit (Activate)
This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE · Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application. · If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to
use the application.
Starting Application Use
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ][ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ][ ] keys > [Op Functions] > [OK] key 3 Start up
1 Select the desired application and select the [OK] key. 2 [ ][ ] keys > [Official] > [OK] key
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key. 3 Enter the license key > [OK] key
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to steps 2 to 4. 4 Select [Yes].
NOTE If you start the ThinPrint Option and enter the license key, you need to turn the power OFF/ON.
757
Appendix > Overview of the Applications
Checking Details of Application
1 Display the screen [System Menu/Counter] key > [ ] [ ] keys > [System/Network] > [OK] key NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Op Functions] > [OK] key 3 Check details
1 Select the desired application and select [Menu]. 2 [ ] [ ] keys > [Detail] > [OK] key
NOTE You can reference detailed information for the selected application. Select the [ ] key to display the next page. Select the [ ] key to return to the previous page. The items that can be referenced are as follows: · Function Name · License On · Trial Counts · Date of Trial · Status NOTE To extend the trial period, select [ ][ ] keys > [Trial] > [Extend] > [Yes].
758
Appendix > Character Entry
Character Entry
The text entry screen used for entry of things like names is explained below. NOTE
Kanji cannot be entered from the operation panel. You can enter kanji from your computer using Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer. Accessing Command Center RX (page 111)
Key used
Use the following keys entercharacters.
1 Message display The entered text is displayed.
2 Cursor Text will be entered at the position of the cursor.
3 Right selection key Select if you are going to select the type for entered text. Only enabled when the key tab is displayed on the message display.
759
Appendix > Character Entry 4 [OK] key
Confirm the entered text. 5 [Clear] key
Confirm the entered text. 6 Numeric Keys
Select when moving the cursor of the text display portion or when selecting text from the text list. 7 Arrow keys
Select when moving the cursor of the text display portion or when selecting text from the text list.
760
Appendix > Character Entry
Character Entry Selection
To enter characters, the following three types are available:
1 Switch input characters Select [Text] on the character input screen, use the [ ] [ ] keys to select the type of character you want to enter, and then select the [OK] key.
761
Appendix > Character Entry
Entering numbers and alphabets
1 Refer to the table below and select the key that corresponds to the character you want to enter until that character appears.
762
Appendix > Character Entry
Entering Symbols
Symbols can be entered.
1 Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list. 2 Select the [ ][ ][ ][ ] key to move the cursor and select the symbol to be
entered.
3 Select the [OK] key. The selected symbol is entered.
763
Appendix > Character Entry
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter "R&D" for example.
1 Select the [7] key three times. [r] is entered.
2 Select the [*/.] key. [r] changes to [R].
3 Select the [ ] key. The cursor moves to the right.
4 Select the [#] key. Displays the symbol list.
5 Select the [ ] or [ ] key to move the cursor and select [&].
6 Select the [OK] key. [&] is entered.
764
Appendix > Character Entry
7 Select the [3] key four times. [D] is entered. 8 Select the [ ] key.
765
Appendix > Character Entry
In the login operation settings, select and enter[Text]
The login screen displayed when user management is enabled may require different input methods depending on the settings. For the procedure for configuring login operation settings, refer to the following: Login Operation (page 449)
1 Select the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] key to move the cursor and select the character to be entered.
2 Select the [OK] key. The selected character is entered.
You can go back one character by selecting the [Clear] key.
3 When the entry is complete, select [Complete].
766
Appendix > About Paper
About Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the following: Specifications (page 781)
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine.
Weight
Item
Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners Moisture Content Pulp content
Specifications
Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2 Multipurpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 ±0.7 mm 90° ±0.2° 4 to 6% 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
767
Appendix > About Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Using such paper can cause poor print quality. In addition, poor paper feeding can cause paper jams and shorten the life of the machine. Use paper with a smooth and even surface. However, do not use paper that has been surface-treated, such as coating, as it may damage the drum and fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum. Be sure to use standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp. Be sure to use standard paper with 20% or less of the paper content consisting of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area.
In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres. Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast. Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%. To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations. · Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place. · Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be
used for a while. · Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the box to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors. · Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours. · Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
768
Appendix > About Paper
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test. · Glossy paper · Watermarked paper · Paper with an uneven surface · Perforated paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine. Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Paper Size
Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2") Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2") Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm) Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2") Letter Legal
Cassette 1 to 3
Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set
MultipurposeTray
Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set
769
Appendix > About Paper
Paper Size
A4 (297 × 210 mm) B5 (257 × 182 mm) A5-R A5 (210 × 148 mm) A6 (148 × 105 mm) B6 (182 × 128 mm) Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8") Envelope #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2") ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm) Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm) Oficio II 216 × 340 mm 16K (273 × 197 mm) Statement Folio (210 × 330 mm) Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) Nagagata 3 Nagagata 4 Yougata 3 Size Input
Cassette 1 to 3
Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size cannot be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size cannot be set
MultipurposeTray
Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Cassette: 105×148 to 216×356 mm Multipurpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm
770
Appendix > About Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. The following paper and media can be used. · Transparencies · Preprint · Bond paper · Recycled paper · Thin paper · Letterhead · Colored Paper · Prepunched paper · Envelopes · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Thick Paper · Labels · Coated Paper · High-quality paper When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper. Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.
771
Appendix > About Paper
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance Thickness Material Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners
Must withstand at least 190°C 0.100 to 0.110 mm Polyester ±0.7 mm 90° ±0.2°
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
772
Appendix > About Paper
Labels
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure. When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems. The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure. Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output.
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight Basis weight(overall paper weight) Top sheet thickness Overall paper thickness Moisture Content
44 to 74 g/m2 104 to 151 g/m2 0.086 to 0.107 mm 0.115 to 0.145 mm 4 to 6 % (composite)
773
Appendix > About Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock) paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams. Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock) on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
774
Appendix > About Paper
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up.
NOTE Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper feeder. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them. Keep the following points in mind. · Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the
adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. · Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window. · If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
775
Appendix > About Paper
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
776
Appendix > About Paper
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications. Basic Paper Specifications (page 767) In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
777
Appendix > About Paper
Preprint
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications Basic Paper Specifications (page 767) The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
778
Appendix > About Paper
Recycled paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately. Basic Paper Specifications (page 767)
NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
779
Appendix > About Paper
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing. The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
780
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item Type Printing Method Paper Weight (Cassette) Paper Weight (Multipurpose Tray) Paper Type (Cassette)
Paper Type (Multipurpose Tray)
Paper Size (Cassette)
Paper Size (Multipurpose Tray)
Print image width Warm-up Time (23°C/73.4°F, 60%) Paper Capacity (Cassette) Paper Capacity (Multipurpose Tray) Output Tray Capacity (Upper tray) Image Write System Memory
Specifications
Desktop
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
60 to 163 g/m2
60 to 220 g/m2, 209.5 g/m2 (Postal card)
Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8(Duplex printing is same as single-sided)
Plain, Transparency, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick Paper, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)
A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, postcard, return postcard, Yougata 4, Yougata 2, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Full surface 4.2 mm
19 seconds or less (from power ON)
250 sheets (80 g/m2)
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
1GB
781
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Specifications
Interface
Operating Environment (Temperature) Operating Environment (Humidity) Operating Environment (Altitude) Operating Environment (Brightness) Dimension (W × D × H) Weight (without toner container) Space Required (W × D) (when using multipurpose tray) Power Source The power consumption in networked standby. The power consumption in off mode. The power consumption of the product in networked standby (If all network ports are connected.) Options
· Hi-Speed USB: 1 · Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) · 1 (Hi-Speed USB) · Wireless LAN compatible · Fax: 1 10 to 32.5 °C
10 to 80 % 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum 1,500 lux maximum
417 x 412 x 437 mm 19 kg 417 x 548 mm
AC220-240 V, 50/60Hz, 4.1 A The information is available at the website below. https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/en/about-us/our-brand/ environmental-policy.html
Option configuration (page 754)
782
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Copy Speed
Paper Size
ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x
A4 LetterR B5R A5R A6R Legal A5 16K
40 sheets/min 42 sheets/min 15 sheets/min*1 15 sheets/min*2 19 sheets/min*3 34 sheets/min 65 sheets/min 12.5 sheets/min*4
* 1: 8.5 sheets / min. for the 5th page and after * 2: 8.5 sheets / min. for the 6th page and after * 3: 8.5 sheets / min. for the 7th page and after * 4: 7.5 sheets / min. for the 5th and after
Copy speed (when using EcoPrint)
ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x
35 sheets/min 37 sheets/min 15 sheets/min*1 15 sheets/min*2 19 sheets/min*3 30 sheets/min 65 sheets/min 12.5 sheets/min*4
Paper Size
A4 LetterR B5R A5R A6R Legal A5 16K
20 sheets/min 21 sheets/min 7.5 sheets/min*1 7.5 sheets/min*1 9.5 sheets/min*2 17 sheets/min 33 sheets/min 6.5 sheets/min*3
* 1: 4.5 sheets/min. for the 7th and after * 2: 5.5 sheets/min. for the 7th and after * 3: 3.5 sheets/min. for the 5th and after
Others
Specifications
Item
First Copy Time (A4, placed on the platen, feed from Cassette)
6.4 seconds or less
Specifications
783
Appendix > Specifications
Zoom Level
Item
Continuous Copying Resolution Original Type
Original Feed System
Specifications
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Preset zoom levels: 400%, 200%, 141%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 70%, 50%, 25%
1 to 999 sheets
600 × 600 dpi
Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 216×356 mm)
Fixed
784
Appendix > Specifications
Printer Function
Print Speed
Paper Size
ECOSYS MA4000fx/ECOSYS MA4000x
ECOSYS MA3500fx/ECOSYS MA3500x
A4 LetterR B5R A5R A6R Legal A5 16K
40 sheets/min 42 sheets/min 9.5 sheets/min*1 9.5 sheets/min*2 11 sheets/min*3 34 sheets/min 65 sheets/min 8.5 sheets/min*4
35 sheets/min 37 sheets/min 9.5 sheets/min*1 9.5 sheets/min*2 11 sheets/min*3 30 sheets/min 65 sheets/min 8.5 sheets/min*4
* 1: 15 sheets / min for the 4th, 8.5 sheets / min. for the 5th page and after * 2: 15 sheets / min for the 5th, 8.5 sheets / min. for the 6th page and after * 3: 19 sheets / min for the 6th, 8.5 sheets / min. for the 7th page and after * 4: 12.5 sheets / min for the 4th, 7.5 sheets / min. for the 5th and after
Others
Item First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) Resolution Operating System
Interface
Page Description Language Emulation
6.4 seconds or less
Specifications
600 × 600 dpi · Windows 10 · Windows 11 · Windows Server 2016 · Windows Server 2019 · Windows Server 2022 · Mac OS X v10.9 or higher · Hi-Speed USB: 1 · Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) · Wireless LAN: 1 (For wireless network model) PRESCRIBE · PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c) · KPDL3 (Postscript3 compatible) · XPS · OpenXPS · PDF
785
Appendix > Specifications
Scanner Functions
Scanning Speed (A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
When using the document processor (except TWAIN scanning)
Item 1-Sided 2-Sided*1 *1Only for ECOSYS MA4000fx
Black and White 40 sheets/min 80 sheets/min
Color 23 sheets/min 46 sheets/min
Others
Item
Specifications
Resolution
File Format Interface Transmission System
· 200 dpi x 200 dpi (Default) · 300 dpi x 300 dpi · 200dpi x 100dpi · 600dpi x 600dpi · 400dpi x 400dpi · 200dpi x 400dpi TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), XPS, PDF/A, High-Compression PDF, Encrypted PDF, Open XPS Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN, WIA, WSD, eSCL
Available Operating Systems: Windows 10/Windows 11/Windows Server 2016/Windows Server 2019/Windows Sever 2022
786
Appendix > Specifications
Document Processor
Item
Specifications
Original Type Original Size
Original Weight Loading Capacity
Sheet originals Maximum: Legal/Folio Minimum: A6/Statement 50 to 160 g/m2 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum Thick paper: 25 sheets
Simultaneous duplex scanning is only available on the ECOSYS MA4000fx
787
Appendix > Specifications
Paper Feeder (300 250 sheet x 2)
Item Paper Supply Method
Paper Size Supported Paper
Dimensions (W × D × H) Weight
Specifications
Friction roller feeder Capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2) × up to 2 cassettes
A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)
Paper thickness: 60 to 163 g/m2 Paper Type: Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Preprint, Bond Paper, Color Paper, Punched Paper, Letterhead, Thick Paper, Fine Paper, Custom
375 × 393 × 100 mm / 14.76" × 15.47" × 3.94"
2.9kg / 6.39lb
788
Appendix > Backing up your data
Backing up your data
If the memory of this machine installed in the machine failed for any reason, the files in the box and various settings saved there will be deleted and cannot be restored. To prevent erasing data, make regular backups as follows. · Take a backup using KYOCERA Net Viewer.
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer (page 789)
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer
Use KYOCERA Net Viewer to regularly back up the data below that is saved on the machine. · System Settings · Network Settings · User List
789
Appendix > Backing up your data
Backing up your date using USB Drive
You can copy the data saved in the Subaddress Box to a USB drive. You can save multiple document data at once. Backing up your date using USB Drive (page 790)
790
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Security Quick Setup Function List
The functions configured in each level of Security Quick Setup are as follows. After selecting the security level, configure the security function according to your operating environment.
TLS
Level 1 On
Level 2 On
Level 3 On
791
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Serverside Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
TLS Version
Level 1 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 2 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Effective Encryption
Level 1
3DES, AES, AES-GCM, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 2
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 3
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Hash
level 1 SHA1, SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
IPP Security
Level 1 Secure Only (IPPS)
Level 2 Secure Only (IPPS)
Level 3 Secure Only (IPPS)
HTTP Security
Level 1 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Level 2 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Level 3 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Enhanced WSD Security
Level 1
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
Level 2
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
Level 3
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
eSCL Security
Level 1 Secure Only (eSCL over TLS)
Level 2 Secure Only (eSCL over TLS)
Level 3 Secure Only (eSCL over TLS)
REST Security
Level 1 Secure Only (REST over TLS)
Level 2 Secure Only (REST over TLS)
Level 3 Secure Only (REST over TLS)
792
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Clientside Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
TLS Version
Level 1 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 2 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Effective Encryption
Level 1
3DES, AES, AES-GCM, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 2
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 3
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Hash
level 1 SHA1, SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
793
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv4 Settings (Wired Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
level 1 Off
Auto
level 2
level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
794
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv4 Settings (Wireless Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
level 1 Off
Auto
level 2
level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
795
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv6 Settings (Wired Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
level 1 Off
Auto
level 2
level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
796
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv6 Settings (Wireless Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
level 1 Off
Auto
level 2
level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
797
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocols: FTP Client (Transmission)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
798
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: HTTP (Client)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
799
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: SOAP
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Use Default Settings
Level 1
Level 2
On
On
On
Level 3
800
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: LDAP
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Use Default Settings
Level 1 Off
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
801
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocols: SMTP (E-mail TX)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
802
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Email: POP3 User Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
level 1 Expiration Date
level 2 Expiration Date
level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
803
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Print protocols
SMB Server Protocol
level 1
level 2
Off
Off
Off
LPD
Level 1
Level 2
On
On
Off
FTP (Receiving)
Level 1
Level 2
On
Off
Off
IPP
Level 1
Level 2
On
Off
Off
IPP over TLS
Level 1
Level 2
On
On
On
Raw
Level 1
Level 2
On
On
Off
ThinPrint
Level 1
Level 2
On
Off
Off
ThinPrint over TLS
Level 1
Level 2
On
--*1
--*1
*1 If you select [Level 2] or [Level 3] in "SecurityQuickSet", this setting will disappear.
WSD Print
Level 1
Level 2
On
Off
Off
804
level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3
Level 3
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
POP (E-mail RX)
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2
Level 3 Off
805
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocol
FTP Client (Transmission)
Level 1
On
Off
SMB
Level 1
On
On
WSD Scan
Level 1
On
Off
eSCL
Level 1
On
Off
eSCL over TLS
Level 1
On
On
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
806
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols
SNMPv1/v2c
Level 1
On
On
SNMPv3
Level 1
Off
Off
HTTP
Level 1
On
Off
HTTPS
Level 1
On
On
Enhanced WSD
Level 1
On
Off
Enhanced WSD (TLS)
Level 1
On
On
LDAP
Level 1
Off
Off
LLTD
Level 1
Off
Off
REST
Level 1
On
Off
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
807
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
REST over TLS
Level 1
On
On
VNC (RFB)
Level 1
Off
Off
VNC (RFB) over TLS
Level 1
Off
Off
Enhanced VNC (RFB) over TLS
Level 1
On
Off
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
808
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
TCP/IP: Bonjour Settings
Bonjour
Level 1
On
On
Level 2
Level 3 Off
809
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2
Level 3 Off
810
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Connectivity
Bluetooth Settings
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2
Level 3 Off
811
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Interface Block Setting
USB Host
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
USB Device
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
USB Drive
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Block
Level 3
Block
Level 3
Block
Level 3
812
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Energy Saver/Timer
Auto Panel Reset
Level 1
On
On
Level 2
Level 3 On
813
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
User Account Lockout Setting
Lockout
level 1 Off
level 2 Off
level 3 On
814
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Job Status/Job Logs Settings
Display Jobs Detail Status
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Display Jobs Log
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Display Fax Log
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
815
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Edit Restriction
Address Book
No limit
Level 1
One-Touch Key
No limit
Level 1
No limit No limit
Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Administrator only
Level 3 Administrator only
816
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Prevent Mis-sending Settings
Destination Check before Send
Level 1 On
Level 2 On
Entry Check for New Dest.
Level 1 On
Level 2 On
New Destination Entry
Permit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
New destination entry (FAX)
Permit
Level 1
Permit
*1 If you select in , this setting will disappear.
Recall Destination
Level 2
Prohibit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Broadcast
Permit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Level 3 On
Level 3 On
Prohibit
Level 3
--*1
Level 3
Prohibit
Level 3
Prohibit
Level 3
817
For the Kyocera contact in your region, see Sales Sites sections here. https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/company/directory.html
© 2025 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. The Kyocera logo is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
Antenna House XSL Formatter V7.3 MR5 Linux : 7.3.6.62109 (2023-09-14T17:58 09) Antenna House PDF Output Library 7.3.1871